JP5323598B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after a game medium passes through a start area provided in the game area. Variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information and deriving and displaying a display result is provided for a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls an advantageous specific gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). In some cases, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the game can be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player.

  As such a gaming machine, in the variable display device, the identification information that becomes a non-specific display result is temporarily stopped in all the variable display units until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the identification information is started. There is a gaming machine that is configured so that a re-variation display effect can be performed in which re-variation for re-execution of variation display on all the variable display portions is performed once or a plurality of times.

  As a gaming machine that performs such a re-variable display, the probability that the re-variable display will be in a specific gaming state is higher than the case where the re-variable display is not performed, and the number of re-variable display is Depending on the probability of entering the specific gaming state, the determination as to whether or not to perform re-variable display and the number of times of performing re-variable display are determined so that the greater the number, the higher the probability of entering the specific gaming state. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-21094 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the player's consciousness during variable display tends to concentrate on confirming how many times re-variable display is performed, and the effect during variable display is monotonous for the player. There was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and improve the fun of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a second start formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B). After a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a winning opening, etc., each is determined based on the establishment of a start condition that permits the start of variable display (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231). A variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified (for example, decorative symbols) and displays and displays the display result is provided. Game machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed as a display result of the identification information. For example, a pachinko like game machine 1), when the starting region game media passes, the specific game state determination random number for determining whether to control the specific game state, of the identification information extracting means for extracting the variable display determination random number for determining a variable display pattern, the variable display of said despite game medium has passed the start area start condition is not satisfied, the extraction means extracts pending storing means for storing said specific gaming state determination random number and the variable display determination random number as pending memory within a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., "8", etc.) (e.g., the first Japanese view pending storage unit 151A Table a and such second Laid view pending storage unit 151B), based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, by using the specific game state determination random number, whether to control the specific game state A pre-determining means for determining the derivation display previous results (e.g., a portion CPU103 executes the process of step S240, S241), a determination result of the The pre determining means, said holding memory when the start condition is met Variable display of the identification information is started on the basis of the number of reserved storage stored in the memory, the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extraction means, and the determination values corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Specific display pattern (for example, “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect) for performing re-variation display for executing re-variation to be resumed once or a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed. A variable display pattern of the identification information (for example, a decorative pattern variable pattern), Based on the variable display pattern determining means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S272) and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. Variable display executing means for executing variable display (for example, the portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S162) and a movable member (position provided at a position where the player can visually recognize) and operating according to a predetermined effect ( For example, the movable member 35), the variable display determination random number value extracted by the extraction means before determination by the variable display pattern determination means, and the determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns, It determines pending determination means for determining whether or not the variable display pattern of the identification information is the particular variable display pattern based on the For example the moiety etc.) CPU103 executes the process of S211, when it is determined that becomes the specific variable display pattern by said holding determining means, the variable display based on the particular variable display pattern which is the subject of the determination together but selects whether to execute the prediction effect of operating the movable member as a notice effect Te variable display smell before the runs, a plurality of types of prediction effect mode when performing the prediction effect When the notice effect selecting means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S731 to S745) selected from the notice effect mode and the notice effect selecting means are selected to execute the notice effect. In addition, the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display to be determined is based on the selected notice effect mode. A notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect (for example, a part for executing the notice effect of the movable object notice in the process of step S599 when the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S734), and announcement attraction selection means, before SL in accordance with the number of times of re-variation performed in a particular variable display pattern, said selecting a plurality of types of prediction effect mode at different selected rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 7 (a) In addition, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is different corresponding to the variable display result, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G corresponding to the determination result at the time of winning. And at least a part of the determination value corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is recorded by the holding storage means when the start condition is satisfied. Regardless of the number of stored storages to be stored, the same determination value is set, and the determination value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is determined by the hold storage means when the start condition is satisfied. Different determination values are set according to the number of stored storages to be stored, and the non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which a reach state is not established, and the variable of the identification information is compared with the specific variable display pattern. The variable display pattern for shortening includes a variable display pattern for shortening the variable display time from the start of display until the display result is derived and displayed, and the variable display pattern determining means stores the hold storage means when the start condition is satisfied Corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening when the shortening condition based on the number of reserved memories is satisfied, compared with the case where the shortening condition is not satisfied A variable display pattern is determined using a determination value in which a large number of constant values are set, and the hold determination unit determines whether the value of the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extraction unit matches the same determination value. It is characterized by determining whether it becomes the said specific variable display pattern by determining .
According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute an effect using the movable member, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, since the selection ratio of the notice effect mode varies depending on the number of re-variation executions, the expectation for the number of re-variation executions can be improved, and the variation of the production can be increased. The production effect is improved. Furthermore, while a common determination value of a particular variable display pattern regardless pending memory number, the determination of the variable display pattern other than the specific variable display pattern by varying depending on hold memory number, hold stored number Accordingly, the variable display time can be adjusted, and the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible.

The notice effect execution means may perform variable display a plurality of times from variable display before execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern to execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern. For example, the notice effect is repeatedly executed in each of the variable display effects (for example, the variable display effect of “Pseudo-Continuous” 1 to 3 times before) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in steps S735 to S745). The process of step S599 may be executed based on one to three continuous production patterns).
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained until variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a start area provided in the game area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, a second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, etc.). A plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of a start condition that permits the start of variable display after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231). Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) for variably displaying the identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and deriving and displaying the display result, and a predetermined specific display result (for example, a confirmed decorative pattern for the jackpot combination) ) Is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area, the variable display is held within a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “8”, etc.). As a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, etc.) that can be stored as, and whether or not to control to the specific gaming state is determined before the display result derivation display A display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the identification information is started based on a pre-determining unit (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S240 and S241) and a determination result of the pre-determining unit. A specific variable display pattern for performing re-variation display for executing re-variation for executing variable display once or a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the identification information that becomes a non-specific display result by A variable display for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative design) from a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, a variation pattern for executing a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”). Variable display execution for executing variable display of the identification information based on pattern determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S272) and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means Means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S162), a movable member (for example, the movable member 35) provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player, and operating according to a predetermined effect, For the variable display stored as the reserved storage, the variable display pattern of the identification information is the specific display Based on the determination by the hold determination unit (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of S211) that determines whether or not the variable display pattern is obtained, and the specific variable that is the target of the determination based on the determination by the hold determination unit Select whether or not to execute a notice effect for operating the movable member as a notice effect for notifying that the re-variable display is performed in the specific gaming state before the variable display based on the display pattern is executed. In addition, a notice effect selecting means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S821 to S835) that selects a notice effect effect mode when executing the notice effect from a plurality of types of the notice effect effects. When the notice effect selecting means selects to execute the notice effect, the variable display that is the object of the determination is executed. In the specific gaming state prior to the above, the notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect based on the selected notice effect mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 within the effect process during the big hit control in step S164, 43, etc. by executing the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43, etc. during the jackpot gaming state, and the notice effect selection means determines the variable display pattern According to the number of re-variations executed in the specific variable display pattern determined by the means, the plurality of types of notice effect modes are selected at different selection ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 7 (A), The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is different corresponding to the variable display result, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination result at the time of winning and the movable object notice effect pattern determination table 64A to 164G are used to determine a continuous effect pattern), and the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display determining numerical value (for example, a variable pattern type determining random number) extracted when the game medium passes through the starting area. A variable display pattern of the identification information using a determination table (for example, variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D) in which determination values are assigned to the plurality of types of variable display patterns. In the determination table, different determination values are assigned to variable display patterns other than the specific variable display pattern depending on the number of reserved memories when the start condition is satisfied, A common decision value is assigned to a specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means. (For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D, different determination values are assigned to CA1-1, CA2-1, and CA2-4 depending on whether they are for normal use or for shortening. The common determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-3 or CA2-2 to be the reach quasi-continue regardless of whether for normal use or for shortening). The means determines whether or not a variable display pattern of the identification information becomes the specific variable display pattern based on the numerical value for variable display determination and the common determination value.
According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute an effect using the movable member, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, since the selection ratio of the notice effect mode varies depending on the number of re-variation executions, the expectation for the number of re-variation executions can be improved, and the variation of the production can be increased. The production effect is improved. Furthermore, while making the determined value of a specific variable display pattern common regardless of the number of reserved memories, the determined value of a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern is made different according to the number of reserved memories. Accordingly, the variable display time can be adjusted, and the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible.

The specific game state is a state in which a round game state (for example, round game) that is advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times (for example, 15 times or twice), and the notice effect execution means is configured to execute the specific game state. In the plurality of round gaming states (for example, 14 rounds and 15 rounds as shown in FIG. 51), the notice effect is repeatedly executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined by the processes in steps S825 to S835). (The process of step S599 of the continuous effect execution process is executed in the effect process during the big hit control of step S164 based on the movable part notice effect pattern for three times).
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained over a plurality of round game states in the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

When the notice effect selecting means selects the notice effect form of the notice effect that is repeatedly executed, the notice effect selected later is compared with the notice effect selected earlier. The notice effect mode is selected so that the reliability of the specific game state after the effect is executed is not lowered (for example, in the setting of the movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G, “first mode” <“first” In the order of “2 modes”, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are higher, and the movable object notice having a lower reliability than the previous movable object notice is not executed).
According to such a configuration, the specific game by the notice effect is performed according to the effect form of the notice effect executed in the change display pattern even though the player's expectation is enhanced by executing the change display. It is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the reliability of the state is lowered.

The variable display pattern determining means is a first variable display pattern (for example, PB2-1) in which the variable display mode of the identification information is in a predetermined reach state after the temporary stop in the re-variable display as the specific variable display pattern. , PB2-2, PB3-1, PB3-2, PB4-1, PB4-2, PA5-1, PA5-2, etc.) and the variable display means after the temporary stop in the re-variable display A plurality of types including a second variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of PA6-1, PA6-2, etc.) from which the specific display result is derived and displayed after re-variable display is performed on a part of the variable display units. The variable display pattern of the identification information may be determined from among the variable display patterns.
According to such a configuration, the production can be given unexpectedness, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

Notification means for performing predetermined notification when the re-variable display is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variable effect by the game effect lamp 9, the image display device 5, the movable member 35, etc.) When the variable display execution means executes the re-variable display, a notification effect means (notification effect means) executes a notification effect in a notification mode selected from a plurality of types of notification modes as a notification effect to be notified by the notification means. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control further includes steps S775, S776, and a part for executing the process of S599), and the notification effecting unit selects any one of the plurality of notification modes. For example, the notification effect performed by the (A) revariation effect pattern in the revariation effect pattern determination table 165) and the plurality of types of notification modes It is possible to execute a notification effect performed in a notification mode (for example, (A + C) (B + C) (A + B + C) re-variation effect pattern in the re-variation effect pattern determination table 165)) selected and combined. The notification effect executed by the notification effect means has a different reliability depending on the selected notification mode after the notification effect is executed (for example, in the setting of the re-change effect pattern determination table 165, variable display). When the result is “big hit”, it may be configured to be easily determined as a re-variation effect pattern of (A + B + C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the production, prevent the production from becoming monotonous, and improve the fun of the game.

As the variable display means, a first start condition for allowing the variable display to start after the game medium has passed through the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A) as the start area. Based on the establishment (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231), a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) as the start area. Then, based on the establishment of the second start condition that allows the start of variable display (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231), a plurality of types of second identifications that can identify each of them Second variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, etc.) for variably displaying information (for example, the second special figure) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the first variable display means or the first (2) A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result predetermined on the variable display means is derived and displayed as a display result of the first identification information or the second identification information. The hold storage means stores the first hold storage within a predetermined upper limit range for the variable display in which the first start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the first start area. And a variable display in which the second start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the second start area. In And a second holding storage means (for example, the second special figure holding storage section 151B) that can be stored as the second holding storage within a predetermined upper limit number, and the variable display pattern determination means When it is determined by the pre-decision means to control to the specific gaming state, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than when it is determined not to control to the specific gaming state, and the hold determination means For the variable display stored as the first hold storage, first hold determination means for determining whether or not the variable display pattern of the first identification information becomes the specific variable display pattern (for example, the CPU 103 performs step). A portion for executing the processing of step S350B and subsequent steps when it is determined to be “1” in S350A), and the variable display of the second variable display means is the first variable display hand Priority variable display means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S233 to S235) executed with priority over the variable display of the stage, and the frequency at which the game medium passes through the second start area after the end of the specific gaming state Special game state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S313) that controls during a special game state (for example, execution of short-time control (high base state), etc.), and the specific game On the condition that it is not in a state (for example, the CPU 103 has determined Yes in step S350C), the determination by the first hold determination unit is performed, and the notice effect execution unit is stored in the first hold storage unit. The notice effect based on the first hold memory is executed (for example, the CPU 103 determines No in step S350C). If, to avoid running informational display by sending the winning time determination (step S353, S357, processing such S366) the fourth prize when the determination result the process proceeds to step S362 without executing the command. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so as not to execute the notice effect during the big hit gaming state. In this way, the control for prohibiting the notice effect may be performed only for winning the first start winning opening, or may be performed for winning the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, the player recognizes the possibility that the variable display corresponding to the first start area stored on hold after the end of the specific gaming state becomes the specific display result (that is, the specific display result). It is possible to prevent the game that is won in the second starting area from being continued in a state in which it is ensured that

As the variable display means, a first start condition for allowing the variable display to start after the game medium has passed through the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A) as the start area. Based on the establishment (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231), a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) as the start area. Then, based on the establishment of the second start condition that allows the start of variable display (for example, the determination of Yes in step S231), a plurality of types of second identifications that can identify each of them Second variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, etc.) for variably displaying information (for example, the second special figure) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the first variable display means or the first (2) A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result predetermined on the variable display means is derived and displayed as a display result of the first identification information or the second identification information. The hold storage means stores the first hold storage within a predetermined upper limit range for the variable display in which the first start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the first start area. And a variable display in which the second start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the second start area. In And a second holding storage means (for example, the second special figure holding storage section 151B) that can be stored as the second holding storage within a predetermined upper limit number, and the variable display pattern determination means When it is determined by the pre-decision means to control to the specific gaming state, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than when it is determined not to control to the specific gaming state, and the hold determination means For the variable display stored as the first hold storage, first hold determination means for determining whether or not the variable display pattern of the first identification information becomes the specific variable display pattern (for example, the CPU 103 performs step). A portion for executing the processing of step S350B and subsequent steps when it is determined to be “1” in S350A), and the variable display of the second variable display means is the first variable display hand Prioritized variable display means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S233 to S235) executed in preference to the variable display of the stage, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game medium passes through the second start area. Special gaming state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S313) that controls the special gaming state (for example, during execution of the short time control (high base state), etc.) A determination is made by the first hold determining means on condition that the game is not in a special game state (for example, the CPU 103 determines Yes in step S350B), and the notice effect executing means is stored in the first hold storage means. For example, the CPU 103 determines No in step S350B. And when, so as not to execute the prediction effect by sending a winning time of determination (Step S353, S357, processing such S366) the fourth prize when the determination result the process proceeds to step S362 without executing the command. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so as not to execute the notice effect during the big hit gaming state. In this way, the control for prohibiting the notice effect may be performed only for winning the first start winning opening, or may be performed for winning the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, the player recognizes the possibility that the variable display corresponding to the first start area stored on hold after the end of the specific gaming state becomes the specific display result (that is, the specific display result). It is possible to prevent the game that is won in the second starting area from being continued in a state in which it is ensured that

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a player's hand in operation of an operation part, a ball | bend rental switch, and a return switch. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern and a change pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a step-up notice continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a button notice continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a movable object notice effect start determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a movable object notice effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a re-variation effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit pseudo | simulation variation pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting process during continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit mid-continuous production start setting process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit mid-continuous production start setting process in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the big hit medium continuation determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the variable display by displaying the identification information such as decorative symbols in a stopped manner (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display).

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, so that the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the color symbol display area 5A changes in synchronization with the change of the first special figure, and the color symbol display area 5B changes in synchronization with the change of the second special figure.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively. A predetermined color design may be stopped and displayed in accordance with whether the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the first start winning that is not displayed) is changed to green display. Thereafter, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, for example, the display at the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the first start winning prize is removed, and the first The display on each display portion corresponding to one start winning is moved one by one to the left. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to green display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part corresponding to the first start winning prize whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. When the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, normally not displayed ( One of the display parts that are in the (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts corresponding to the second start winning prize that is not displayed) is changed to blue display. Thereafter, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, for example, the display at the leftmost display part of the display part corresponding to the second start winning prize is removed, and the second The display in each display part corresponding to 2 start winnings is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part corresponding to the second start winning prize whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. In this embodiment, eight display portions are provided in the start winning memory display area 5H, of which four on the left are display portions corresponding to the first start winning, and four on the right are the second. It is a display part corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to specify which start winning is corresponding to the reserved storage.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Normally open. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start-up switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Due to this, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A movable member 35 is provided above the image display device 5. During variable display of decorative symbols, there is a possibility that a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” may be executed, the variable display state of decorative symbols may be reached, and the variable display result is “ A movable object notice effect may be executed to notify the player that there is a possibility of being a “hit”. The effect operation in the movable member 35 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. In the movable object notice effect, an effect operation in which the star-shaped movable member 35 rotates during the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, when a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect that operates the movable member 35 may be executed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuous change.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. An operation unit 30 that can be operated by a player is attached to a member forming the hitting ball supply tray. The operation unit 30 is a push button capable of depressing a direction selected from a plurality of predetermined directions (for example, four directions) such as back, front, left, and right (front and rear, left and right) as viewed from the player. A plurality of operation units, which are a circular operation button 32 in a plan view made up of switches and an annular operation dial 33 in a plan view made up of a dial (jog dial) provided around the operation buttons 32 and capable of being rotated. It is configured to include. The operation button 32 can be pressed down in the whole downward direction in addition to the four directions of front, rear, left and right. That is, the player operates the operation buttons 32 in addition to the pressing direction selection operation for selectively pressing one direction from the front, rear, left and right directions in the state of facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the direction selection operation. It is possible to perform an entire pressing determination operation for pressing the entire 32 downward. Further, the player can perform a rotation direction selection operation for selectively rotating the operation dial 33 in one rotation direction of clockwise (clockwise) or counterclockwise (counterclockwise). The player's operation action performed on the operation button 32 and the operation dial 33 is detected by the operation detection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  Note that the operation unit 30 is not limited to a unit that can perform a pressing operation or a rotation operation, and may be a unit that can perform a contact operation or a pressing operation such as a touch panel, or a tilting operation such as a lever-type switch. May be possible. Further, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation unit 30 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select the front direction (back side) (the back side portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is changed to the front direction portion (back direction portion). ). In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select a rear direction (front side) (a front side portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is set to a rear direction portion (front direction portion). ). In the operation button 32, a portion operated to select the left direction (a left portion of the operation button 32 in a state where the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is referred to as a left direction portion. A portion of the operation button 32 that is operated to select the right direction (a right portion of the operation button 32 when the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1) is referred to as a right direction portion.

  In addition to the operation unit 30, the members that form the hitting ball supply tray in the gaming machine frame 3 include a ball lending switch 91 that is operated when a game ball is lent through a predetermined card unit, a prepaid card, and the like. A return switch 92 or the like that is operated when receiving a return is attached. For example, the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 may be arranged on the same surface as the surface on which the operation unit 30 is attached in the hitting ball supply tray, at a position recessed from the surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pressing the ball lending switch 91 or the return switch 92 by mistake while the player is operating the operation unit 30.

  FIG. 2 shows the positional relationship between the player's hand and the ball rental switch 91 and the return switch 92 during operation of the operation unit 30. 2A shows a state in which the operation dial 33 of the operation unit 30 is operated with the left hand, and FIGS. 2B and 2C show a state in which the operation dial 33 is operated with the right hand. Is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 2 (C), when the operation dial 33 is operated with the right hand, the position of the right hand and the position of the ball rental switch 91 or the return switch 92 are unconsciously overlapped by the player. Sometimes. At this time, if the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are installed in a state of protruding on the mounting surface of the operation unit 30 in the hitting ball supply tray, the right hand presses the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92. There is a possibility that an operation unintended by the player may be performed. Therefore, the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged in a recessed position on the mounting surface of the operation unit 30 in the hitting ball supply tray, so that the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are mistakenly operated during the operation of the operation unit 30. This prevents a situation where a hand touches and presses down.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B does not execute the usual game and is tilted. It is possible to perform normal opening control that is performed and returns to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “big hit” is obtained as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “lost” is displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “2” are small hit symbols, and “−” is shown. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round game for changing to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the open cycle of the big winning opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, 15 balls are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round game. A period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (a period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. Become. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of round games executed is the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round game to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in a two-round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In a two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round game, by changing a predetermined winning port serving as a big winning port from a closed state to an open state, etc. Alternatively, the state may be changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and then returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big win state, if a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls will be obtained, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds) Short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. The big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round games executed as compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. While the specific gaming state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period (for example, the multi-round specific gaming state) 29 seconds). In other words, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round game is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, It is sufficient that the number of game executions is at least one of the second round numbers smaller than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control is performed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state Controlled. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special gaming states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the time shortening control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state in each round game in the two round big hit state, the same as in the two round big hit state even in the small hit game state In this manner, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit reliability) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. A variable display effect may be executed for notifying the player by a variable display mode of symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 4A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of change displays including the first change (pseudo-continuous change). In this embodiment, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the period of each change display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, or the game effect There may be a case where a re-variation effect is performed in which the lamp 9 is turned on or the movable member 35 is operated. And, by combining these effects, the ratio that the variable display mode reaches the reach state (reach reliability), the ratio that becomes the super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (big hit) (Reliability) is different. Specifically, when a re-variation effect combining three types of effect devices is executed, the big hit reliability and the super reach reliability are increased. By doing so, it is possible to notify the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, etc. according to the effect mode of the re-variation effect, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. . In addition to the ones listed above, the re-variation effect is one in which sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R or one of a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is lit. You may control so that it may increase gradually. Any player can recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed (re-variation is executed) by an arbitrary effect operation.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In this embodiment, after the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and some decorative symbols are displayed for the pseudo-continuous chance item. After changing the decorative pattern again in the area (for example, the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R), there may be an effect display in which the jackpot combination is finally stopped and displayed (PA6-1 in FIG. 7A). PA6-2 variation pattern "pseudo-ream + slip"). By doing in this way, since some of the decorative symbols slip and become a big hit combination from the quasi-continuous chance, the production can be given unexpectedness and the fun of the game is improved.

  In addition to “pseudo ream” and “slip”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative patterns include, for example, “Development opportunity eyes”, “Development opportunity eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. A variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by a different display operation from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be a reach state, and the variable display result is “big hit” ”May be executed to notify the player that there is a possibility of becoming“. ” For example, the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is variable after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be executed (started) before the display state becomes the reach state (before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “step-up notice”, “button notice”, and “movable object notice” are set to be executable. In this embodiment, a notice effect having continuity may be executed over one or more variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be continuously executed from the variable display 1 to 3 times before the variable display to be notified is executed. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed. In this embodiment, the notice effect continuously executed in this manner is also referred to as a continuous effect.

  In the notice effect of “step-up notice”, an effect display in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design, for example. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image that is separate from the decorative design may be displayed statically or in motion (animation display), or a character image that is variably displayed integrally with the decorative design. The display may be an operation display (animation display) in a display form different from the variable display of the decorative pattern. When the “step-up notice” is executed as a continuous notice, an effect reminiscent of stepping up step by step is executed, such as displaying a continuous character image in each variable display.

  In the notice effect of “button notice”, for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation or a rotating operation) on the operation unit 30 while the decorative symbol is variably displayed, for example, the display of the image display device 5 is performed. The effect operation is changed by changing the display of the effect image on the screen or changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As an example, in the notice effect of “button notice”, a predetermined effect action serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby prompting the player to operate the operation unit 30. Any production operation may be used. The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation action on the operation unit 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that the predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 Or lighting the LED for decoration in a predetermined lighting pattern, or operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 35) provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, Alternatively, any combination of these may be used. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation unit 30 by the player is set. And if operation of the operation part 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, One of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound effect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various effects such as output from 8R are executed.

  In the notice effect of “movable object notice”, an effect operation such as rotation of the movable member 35 is performed during variable display of the decorative symbol. Note that the above-mentioned “step-up notice” and “button notice” are notice effects that use the image display device 5, respectively, and therefore cannot be executed concurrently during variable display of the same decorative design. This “movable object notice” can be executed concurrently as “step-up notice” or “button notice” using a movable member 35 separate from the image display device 5.

  In addition to the “step-up notice”, the “button notice”, and the “movable object notice”, various effect actions may be executed as the notice effect by the effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming an uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. It will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has a symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable big hit combination or a probable variable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect during the stop display of the symbol may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect during the change may be executed.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round will start after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state. During the big hit, which is a notification effect on whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect that notifies that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state. For example, a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the suddenness mode, the display mode of the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal performance mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for informing that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and / or a background image or a decorative pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5. The display mode may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the player may be in the effect mode during probability change in which the player can recognize that the probability change state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board 16, and a payout control board 17 as shown in FIG. ing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the power supply board 16 and the payout control board 17, the production control board 12, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. A drawer relay board 19 is also mounted for relaying various control signals transmitted between the speaker 8, the game effect lamp 9, and the operation detection switch 31. Further, a frame relay board 26 is provided between the drawer relay board 19 and the speaker 8, the game effect lamp 9, and the operation detection switch 31 for relaying various control signals. In addition, various boards such as an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  The power supply board 16 supplies electric power to various boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 and effects devices such as the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speaker 8.

  As shown in FIG. 3, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. When the main board 11 receives detection signals from various switches, the main board 11 sends out a prize ball signal for executing a prize ball payout corresponding to the various switches to the payout control board 17. The winning ball signal is transmitted via the power supply board 16. When the payout control board 17 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 18 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set in accordance with whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, an effect operation may be executed during the two round big hit state and / or during the small hit game state according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The command B1XXH is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that a first start condition for executing a special figure game using one special figure has been established. In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the first start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the determined value that makes the variable display result “big hit”. Whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the non-reach-losing pseudo continuous variation pattern (regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (the special figure reserved memory number)). For example, a non-reach loss pseudo-continuous variation in which the variable display result is “losing”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Whether or not it is within the pattern common range, reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is “losing”, and the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed and the variation pattern with reach is performed. Whether or not it is within the common range of reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern, and whether or not the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is “big hit” and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed) Different EXT data is set in accordance with whether or not the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range). More specifically, the command B100H is a first winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the common range of non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation patterns. The command B101H is a second winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. The command B102H is a third winning determination result notification command for notifying that the jackpot pseudo-continuous variation pattern is within the common range. The command B103H is a fourth winning determination result notification command for notifying any of the above (a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed).

  The command B2XXH is generated by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. In this embodiment, the second start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the second start winning that is at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the second start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the determined value that makes the variable display result “big hit”. Whether or not the numerical value data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type indicates the variation pattern of the decorative symbol regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (the special figure reserved memory number). (For example, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “lost”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed). Whether or not the variation pattern is within the common range, reach losing quasi-continuous variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is “losing”, and the quasi-continuous variable display effect is executed, and variation with reach Whether or not it is within the common range of reach-losing quasi-continuous variation patterns to be turned), or a big hit quasi-continuous variation pattern (for example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Different EXT data is set depending on whether or not the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range (corresponding variation pattern) is within. More specifically, the command B200H is a fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. Command B201H is a sixth winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. The command B202H is a seventh winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “win”. The command B 203H is an eighth winning determination result notification command for notifying any of the above (the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed).

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number so as to be specified in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  In this way, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “251”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “997”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state where the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not to change to a state in which a game ball is likely to enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7A shows a variation pattern of the decorative design in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 are prepared in advance as non-reach loss fluctuation patterns. Further, as the reach loss variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PA6-1, a fluctuation pattern PA6-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 7B shows the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns by the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7B, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 are previously stored in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “non-reach” variable display mode. It is prepared. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , Includes a variation pattern associated with “no shortening” in advance. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is, for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol in response to the total reserved memory number being “3” or more, or the time shortening control being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which the time is shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “with shortening”. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “pseudo train” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo train” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and corresponds to “pseudo train” in advance. Includes attached variation patterns.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, a variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” is executed, and after the variable display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, the normal reach is included, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination is displayed. The variation pattern type of “with normal reach (lost) pseudo-relation” to be derived and displayed includes a variation pattern associated with “normal reach (loss) pseudo-ream” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA2-3 is not a “variable display” variable display effect, but is accompanied by a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after setting the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “with a super-reach (lack) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and a variation pattern previously associated with “with a super-reach (lack) pseudo-ream” Is included. For the variation pattern type CA2-4, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, and the reach effect ends with the super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state. This is a variation pattern type of “no super reach (lack) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern that is associated with “super reach (lack)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed, and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state, followed by normal reach or super reach. A variation pattern type of “With normal / super reach (big hit) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definitive decorative design, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal / super reach (big hit) pseudo-ream” . In the variation pattern type CA3-3, the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, the variable symbol display state of the decorative design is changed to the reach state, followed by super reach, and the jackpot combination is determined when the reach effect ends. It is a variation pattern type of “no super reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying decorative symbols, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no super reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4, and “2nd release chance stop”. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1-3 is a variation pattern in which the definite decorative symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4. It is included in the pattern type CA4-1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative design is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. It will be.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is one. When the variable display result is “reach lose”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is once or twice. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is 1 to 3 times. Thus, in this embodiment, as the number of quasi-continuous fluctuations increases, the reliability that the reach or the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and decorative symbols as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 130 is determined to be a variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state with "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with "small hit" FIG. 11 is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special graphic game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the determined value is assigned to the special symbol display result of “small hit”. May be different. As an example, in the case of a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the ratio determined as the special figure display result of “small hit” compared to the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A As a result, a determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening due to the high opening control in the short time state, the special figure display result is “small hit” and the little hit game state in which almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment due to the occurrence of a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value may be assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 is variably displayed based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and control is made to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 12 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B sets the second special symbol display device 4B. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the allocation of the determined value for each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 9, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With such a setting, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 10B, and FIG. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10 and the loss change pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No determination value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are determined (predetermined) as the special figure display result to be “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used when the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special when, for example, the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. It is selected as a use table when the variable display time of symbols and decorative symbols is shortened.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Furthermore, when the total number of reserved memories is “0”, when the total number of reserved memories is “1”, when the total number of reserved memories is “2”, the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to different determination tables when there is a certain number and when the total number of reserved storage is “4” or more. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”, the variation pattern type is determined with reference to a common determination table, while the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to a different determination table when the total number of reserved storage is “4” or more. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, the variation pattern type is determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than a predetermined number. You may do it. In this case, when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3” or the like), the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that has a shorter variable display time than when it is less than the predetermined number. It suffices that the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to be higher. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part. For example, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D have different assignments of determination values to the variation pattern type CA2-1. Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern is not assigned. A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-3. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. And a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-2. Thereby, depending on whether or not the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “220” to “238”, the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories Regardless, the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the variable pattern type CA1-3 including the variable pattern in which the “quasi-continuous” variable display effect is executed is determined. That is, when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is any one of “220” to “238”, the “pseudo-continuous” A variable display effect is executed, and a variable display of decorative symbols without reach is executed.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “239” to “251”, the gaming state and the total suspension Regardless of the number of memories, the variable display mode is “reach” (normal reach or super reach), and the change pattern type CA2-2 or CA2-3 includes the change pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. To be determined. That is, when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is any one of “239” to “251”, the “pseudo-continuous” Variable display effect is executed. The variable display of the decorative design with reach is executed.

  In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” as shown in FIG. 7B. It is a variation pattern type. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It can be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is set to the reach state.

  The determination value assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is the same as the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C. More than the decision value assigned. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than when the variable symbol is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with the case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 11A and a hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 11B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “loss”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7A, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7A, the fluctuation patterns PA1-4 have pseudo continuous fluctuations with a variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. This is a variation pattern in which (revariation) is executed once. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by being determined as the variation pattern PA1-4. Can do.

  When the hit variation pattern determination table 133B is determined (pre-determined) as the special figure display result to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the fluctuation pattern determination random number is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (hit variation patterns) corresponding to.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board 16. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 12 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game. A control counter setting unit 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates with a holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening and sets the first start condition by the winning (game ball detection). Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 is set as pending data, and stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A as the hold data.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball in the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and sets the second start condition by the winning (game ball detection). Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 is set as pending data, and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B as holding data.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, a big hit medium flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 22 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 22 in order to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Instruct.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is started, while the probability change state or the time reduction state is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to. The big hit flag is set to an on state in response to the start of the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while being cleared to an off state in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. .

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a short time counter, a round number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected with a wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal from the operation detection switch 31 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation unit 30 has been detected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, a random value SR1 for determining a continuous effect pattern type, a random value SR2-1 for determining a first continuous effect pattern, and a second continuous effect. Random value SR2-2 for determining the pattern, Random value SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern, Random value SR3 for determining the start of the moving object notice effect, Random value SR4-1 for determining the first moveable object notice effect The numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second movable object notice effect, the random value SR4-3 for determining the third movable object notice effect, and the random value SR5 for determining the re-variable effect can be counted. Controlled. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 21 to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1, SR2-1 to S2-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5 may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and calculation processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124, the numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may count numerical data indicating all the effect random numbers using a random counter.

  The random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type is a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect (notice effect) and the continuous effect pattern type, and is “1” to “51”. Takes a value in the range. In this embodiment, according to the value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value), whether or not the continuous effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side is different. It is determined.

  The random value SR2-1 for determining the first continuous effect pattern is a continuous effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the first variable display when the continuous effect (notice effect) is executed. This is a random value used to determine the value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random value SR2-2 for determining the second continuous effect pattern determines any one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the continuous effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the second variable display when the continuous effect is executed. This is a random value used for this purpose and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random value SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern determines a continuous effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the third variable display when executing the continuous effect as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. This is a random value used for this purpose and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random value SR3 for determining the start of the moving object notice effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the moving object notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “51”. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the movable object notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side differs according to the value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value). Determined by percentage.

  The random number SR4-1 for determining the first movable object announcement effect pattern is a plurality of patterns prepared in advance for the movable object announcement effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the first variable display when the movable object announcement effect is executed. Is a random value used to determine one of the values, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random number SR4-2 for determining the second movable object announcement effect pattern is a plurality of patterns prepared in advance for the movable object announcement effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the second variable display when the movable object announcement effect is executed. Is a random value used to determine one of the values, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random number SR4-3 for determining the third movable object notice effect pattern is a plurality of patterns prepared in advance of the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the third variable display when the movable object notice effect is executed. Is a random value used to determine one of the values, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random number value SR5 for determining the re-variation effect is a random value for determining the re-change effect when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”. .

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the continuous effect pattern type determination table 160 stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect pattern type determination table 160 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect (notice effect) and the continuous effect pattern type based on the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type. It is. In the continuous performance pattern type determination table 160, the value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 21 is “1” or “5”. Depending on whether it is “2” or “6”, “3” or “7”, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type is not the start of the continuous effect. , “Step-up notice” or “button notice” is assigned to the determination result.

  Here, the winning determination result buffer determines the variation pattern type extracted from the random circuit 104 or the like on the side of the main board 11 at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has entered (start winning) the first starting winning opening is detected. The random number value MR3 is updated to “1” based on the determination that the random number value MR3 for use is within the common range of the non-reach lose pseudo-variable pattern. The winning determination result buffer is for determining a variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball that has entered (start winning) is detected in the first starting winning opening. Is determined to be within the range of the reach-losing pseudo-variable pattern common range, the value is updated to “2”. The winning determination result buffer is for determining a variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball that has entered (start winning) is detected in the first starting winning opening. The random value MR3 is updated to “3” based on the determination that the random number MR3 is within the common hit pseudo-variable pattern common range. The winning determination result buffer is for determining a variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball entering (starting winning) is detected in the second start winning opening. The random value MR3 is updated to “5” based on the determination that the random value MR3 is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. The winning determination result buffer is for determining a variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball entering (starting winning) is detected in the second start winning opening. Is determined to be within the range of the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range, the value is updated to “6”. The winning determination result buffer is for determining a variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like on the main board 11 side at the time of starting winning when a game ball entering (starting winning) is detected in the second start winning opening. The random number MR3 is updated to “7” based on the determination that the random hit value MR3 is within the range of the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range.

  In the setting example of the continuous performance pattern type determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”, “2” or “6”, “3” or “ Depending on whether it is “7”, the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the presence / absence of the continuous production start is different. With such a setting, the random number MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning is within the common reach non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range, the reach-losing pseudo continuous variation pattern common range, or the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. Depending on the situation, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of whether or not to start the continuous performance. In the setting example of the continuous performance pattern type determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14, when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7”, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”. ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 6 ”, more decision values are assigned to the decision result (“ step-up notice ”or“ button notice ”) for executing the continuous performance. With such a setting, when the random value MR1 extracted at the time of winning the start matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, the continuous effect is performed at a higher rate than when it does not match. A decision to start can be made. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced more than when the continuous effect is not executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the setting example of the continuous performance pattern type determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14, when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6”, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”. “A larger number of determination values than those in a certain case are assigned to a determination result (“ step-up notice ”or“ button notice ”) to execute the continuous performance. With such a setting, when the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning the start matches with the determined value to reach, it is determined that the continuous production starts at a higher rate than when it does not match. It can be carried out. Therefore, when the continuous production is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the sense of expectation to reach as compared to when the continuous production is not executed.

  When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be started, that is, when the continuous effect pattern type is determined as “step-up notice” or “button notice”, the continuous effect pattern is subsequently determined.

  15A to 15G show configuration examples of the step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 161A to 161G stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination tables 161A to 161G shown in FIGS. 15A to 15G indicate the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern when the continuous effect pattern type is determined as “step-up notice”. Based on -1 to SR2-3, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine a usage pattern from among a plurality of “step-up notice” continuous performance patterns. FIGS. 16A to 16G show configuration examples of button notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 162A to 162G stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The button notice continuous effect pattern determination tables 162A to 162G shown in FIGS. 16A to 16G indicate the random value SR2-1 for determining the continuous effect pattern when the continuous effect pattern type is determined as “button notice”. Based on ~ SR2-3, this is a table that is referred to in order to determine a usage pattern from among a plurality of “button notice” continuous performance patterns.

  Depending on the number of reserved memories (continuous effect count value) when the decision to start the “step-up notice” or “button notice” is made, “step-up” is performed over 1 to 3 variable displays. A continuous effect (notice effect) of “notice” or “button notice” is executed. Here, the continuous effect count value is a count value of a continuous effect counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. For example, when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” to “3” corresponding to the start of the continuous effect, the continuous effect count value is continuously the value of the first variation number counter (first variation number count value). When the effect count initial value is set and the winning determination result buffer value is “5” to “7”, the value of the second variation number counter is set as the continuous effect count value. After that, every time the decorative symbol variable display is executed, it is updated to subtract one.

  The first variation count value is updated by adding 1 when the first start port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the fourth winning determination result notification command. Further, when the first variation count value is other than “0”, when the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the first to third winning determination result notification command, One is added and updated. On the other hand, the second variation count value is updated by adding 1 when the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the eighth winning determination result notification command. Further, when the second variation count value is other than “0”, when the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is the fifth to seventh winning determination result notification command, One is added and updated.

  The first step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination table 161A is a table referred to in order to determine the continuous effect pattern of the first step-up notice. In the first continuous performance pattern determination table 161A, whether the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”, “2” or “6”, “3” or “7”, The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-1 for determining the first continuous performance pattern according to the value is any of the “first step”, “second step”, and “third step” continuous performance patterns. Assigned to.

  The second step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination table 161B indicates that when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach lose”, the second step-up notice continuous success pattern is determined. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 161B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern, corresponding to which of the first step-up notice is, It is assigned to one of the “first step” and “second step” continuous performance patterns.

  The third step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination table 161C indicates that the third step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161C is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach lose” when the winning determination result buffer value is “non-reach lose”. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the third continuous effect pattern determination table 161C, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern, corresponding to which of the second step-up notice is, It is assigned to one of the “first step” and “second step” continuous performance patterns.

  The second step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161D has a second step-up notice continuous effect when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”. It is a table referred to for determining a pattern. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 161D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern in correspondence with which the first step-up notice is, It is assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns of “first step”, “second step”, and “third step”.

  The third step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161E indicates that when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”, the third step-up notice continuous effect is determined. It is a table referred to for determining a pattern. In the third continuous production pattern determination table 161E, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR2-3 for determining the third continuous production pattern, corresponding to which of the second step-up notice is given, It is assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns of “first step”, “second step”, and “third step”.

  The second step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161F indicates that the second step-up notice continuous effect is displayed when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”. It is a table referred to for determining a pattern. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 161F, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern corresponding to which one of the first step-up notices is given, It is assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns of “first step”, “second step”, and “third step”.

  The third step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161G indicates that when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”, the third step-up notice continuous effect is determined. It is a table referred to for determining a pattern. In the third continuous effect pattern determination table 161G, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern, corresponding to which of the second step-up notice is given, It is assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns of “first step”, “second step”, and “third step”.

  In this embodiment, three types of “first step”, “second step”, and “third step” are prepared as continuous effect patterns of step-up notice. In the “first step”, “second step”, and “third step”, the presentation mode is changed, for example, the displayed character is different. In this embodiment, one character image is displayed in the “first step”, two character images are displayed in the “second step”, and three character images are displayed in the “third step”. It has become so. In the variable display of up to 3 times, the variable display result will be “big hit” or the variable display state will be reached depending on the step up to which the step is up. Specifically, in the setting of the step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 161A to 161G, when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”, “1” ”Or“ 5 ”,“ 2 ”or“ 6 ”, it is easier to step up to the“ third step ”. With such a setting, when the “third step” step-up notice is executed, the possibility (reliability) of being a “big hit” can be increased. On the other hand, when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach lose”, the step up is performed only until “second step”. In the case of “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”, the process may be stepped up to “Third Step”. By doing so, it is determined that the “reach” is made when the “third step” step-up notice is executed.

  In addition, in the setting of the step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 161A to 161G, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability increase in the order of “first step” <“second step” <“third step”. The step-up notice with lower reliability than the previous step-up notice is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  The first button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162A is a table referred to in order to determine the continuous effect pattern of the first button notice. In the first continuous performance pattern determination table 162A, whether the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”, “2” or “6”, “3” or “7”, The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2-1 for determining the first continuous production pattern in accordance with the continuous production pattern of “...”, “CHANCE”, “GOOD LUCK” Assigned to any of the button notice messages). “...”, “CHANCE”, and “GOOD LUCK” are characters to be displayed on the screen display device 5 when the operation button 32 is operated in the button notice.

  The second button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162B indicates that the second button notice continuous effect pattern when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach lose”. It is a table that is referred to to determine. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 162B, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern corresponding to which of the first button notice is “ ... ”And“ CHANCE ”are assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns.

  The third button advance notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162C indicates that the third button notice notice continuous effect pattern when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach lose”. It is a table that is referred to to determine. In the third continuous performance pattern determination table 162C, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR2-3 for determining the third continuous performance pattern corresponds to which is the second button notice. ... ”And“ CHANCE ”are assigned to one of the continuous performance patterns.

  The second button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162D displays the second button notice continuous effect pattern when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”. It is a table that is referenced to determine. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 162D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern corresponds to which is the first button notice. ... ”,“ CHANCE ”, and“ GOOD LUCK ”.

  The third button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162E displays the continuous effect pattern of the third button notice when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”. It is a table that is referenced to determine. In the third continuous effect pattern determination table 162E, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern corresponds to which is the second button notice. ... ”,“ CHANCE ”, and“ GOOD LUCK ”.

  The second button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162F shows the second button notice continuous effect pattern when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”. It is a table that is referenced to determine. In the second continuous production pattern determination table 162F, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 for determining the second continuous production pattern is “ ... ”,“ CHANCE ”, and“ GOOD LUCK ”.

  The third button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162G shows the third button notice continuous effect pattern when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”. It is a table that is referenced to determine. In the third continuous performance pattern determination table 162G, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR2-3 for determining the third continuous performance pattern corresponds to which is the second button notice. .. ”,“ CHANCE ”, and“ GOOD LUCK ”.

  In this embodiment, three types of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “GOOD LUCK” are prepared as continuous effect patterns for button notices. It is notified in advance that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or that the variable display state will be reached depending on whether characters are displayed in variable display up to three times. Specifically, in the setting of the button notice continuous effect pattern determination tables 162A to 162G, when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”, “1” is set. Or, the characters “GOOD LUCK” are easier to display than the case of “5”, “2”, or “6”. With such a setting, when a button notice in which the characters “GOOD LUCK” are displayed is executed, the possibility (reliability) of “big hit” can be increased. When the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach loss”, the character “GOOD LUCK” is not displayed, while “reach loss” In the case of “2” or “6” corresponding to “”, the characters “GOOD LUCK” may be displayed. By doing so, it is determined that “reach” is made when a button notice in which “GOOD LUCK” is displayed is executed.

  In addition, in the setting of the button notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 162A to 162G, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability increase in the order of “...” <“CHANCE” <“GOOD LUCK”. The button notice with lower reliability than the notice is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the movable object notice start determination table 163 stored in the ROM 121. The movable object notice start determination table 163 is a table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to start the movable object notice effect based on the random value SR3 for determining the start of the movable object notice effect. In the movable object notice start determination table 163, the value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 21 is “1” or “5”. Depending on whether it is “2” or “6”, “3” or “7”, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value SR3 for determining the start of the moving object notice effect is “movable object”. It is assigned to a determination result corresponding to “No notice effect” or “Movable object notice effect”.

  In the setting example of the movable object notice start determination table 163 shown in FIG. 17, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”, “2” or “6”, “3” or “ Depending on whether it is “7”, the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the presence / absence of the start of moving object notice effect is different. With such a setting, the random value MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range, the reach-losing pseudo continuous variation pattern common range, or the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. Depending on whether or not, the decision ratio of whether or not to start the movable object notice effect can be varied. Further, in the setting example of the movable object notice start determination table 163 illustrated in FIG. 17, when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7”, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”. ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 6 ”, more decision values are assigned to the decision result for executing the movable object notice effect. With such a setting, when the random value MR1 extracted at the time of winning the start matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, the movable object notice is given at a higher rate than when the random value MR1 does not match. A decision to start production can be made. Therefore, when the movable object notice effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” can be enhanced more than when the movable object notice effect is not executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the setting example of the movable object notice start determination table 163 shown in FIG. 17, when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6”, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”. More decision values are assigned to the decision result indicating that the movable object notice effect is to be executed. With such a setting, when the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning the start matches with the determined value to reach, the moving object notice effect is started at a higher rate than when it does not match. A decision can be made. Therefore, when the movable object notice effect is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the sense of expectation of reaching as compared to when the movable object notice effect is not executed.

  If the decision to start the movable object notice effect is made, then the movable object notice effect pattern is decided.

  18A to 18G show configuration examples of the advance notice movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (G) are random values for determining the movable object notice effect pattern when it is determined that the movable object notice effect is started. It is a table referred to in order to determine a usage pattern from among a plurality of movable object notice effect patterns based on SR4-1 to SR4-3.

  Depending on the number of reserved memories (continuous effect count value) when the decision to start the movable object notice effect is made, the movable object notice effect is executed over 1 to 3 variable displays.

  The first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A is a table referred to in order to determine the movable object notice effect pattern for the first movable object notice. In the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A, the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5”, “2” or “6”, or “3” or “7”. Depending on whether the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR4-1 for determining the first movable object notice effect pattern is the “first aspect” or “second aspect” of the movable object notice effect pattern. Assigned to.

  The second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164B indicates that the movable object notice of the second movable object notice is obtained when the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach loss”. It is a table referred in order to determine a notice production pattern. In the second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164B, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-2 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to which of the first movable object notice effect patterns. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  When the winning determination result buffer value is “1” or “5” corresponding to “non-reach loss”, the third movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164C is movable for the third movable object notice. It is a table referred in order to determine a notice production pattern. In the third movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164C, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-3 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to the second movable object notice effect pattern. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  The second-time movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164D indicates that the movable object notice of the second-time movable object notice is obtained when the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164D, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-2 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to the first movable object notice effect pattern. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  When the winning determination result buffer value is “2” or “6” corresponding to “Leach Loss”, the third movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164E has a movable object notice for the third movable object notice. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the third movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164E, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-3 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to the second movable object notice effect pattern. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  The second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164F shows the movable object notice of the second movable object notice when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164F, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-2 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to which of the first movable object notice effect patterns. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  The third-time movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164G indicates that the movable object notice of the third movable object notice is obtained when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”. It is a table referred in order to determine an effect pattern. In the third movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164G, a numerical value (determined) is compared with the random value SR4-3 for determining the movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to the second movable object notice effect pattern. Value) is assigned to one of the movable object notice effect patterns of the “first mode” and the “second mode”.

  In this embodiment, two types of “first mode” and “second mode” are prepared as the moving object notice effect patterns of the moving object notice. In the “first mode” and the “second mode”, the production mode is made different, for example, the operation mode (such as the rotating direction) of the movable member 35 is changed. In this embodiment, the movable member 35 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in the “first mode”, and the movable member 35 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in the “second mode”. Yes. It is notified in advance that the variable display result will be “big hit” or the variable display state will be reached depending on which “first mode” or “second mode” is selected in the variable display up to three times. Specifically, in the setting of the movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G, when the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or “7” corresponding to “big hit”, “1” is set. Or it becomes easier to become the “second mode” than the case of “5”, “2” or “6”. With this setting, when the “second aspect” of the movable object notice is executed, the possibility (reliability) of “big hit” can be increased.

  In addition, in the setting of the movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability increase in the order of “first mode” <“second mode”. However, the moving object notice with low reliability is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the re-variation effect pattern determination table 165 stored in the ROM 121. The re-variation effect pattern determination table 165 shows the re-variation effect determination pattern of the re-variation effect executed during the period of each variable display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on numerical value SR5. In the re-variation effect pattern determination table 165, the re-variation production pattern determination table 165 re-depends on whether the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach lose”, “normal reach lose”, “super reach lose”, “big hit”, or “surprise / small hit”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random effect determination random value SR5 is assigned to the determination result corresponding to the re-variation effect pattern. In this embodiment, a re-variation effect is performed by combining three types of effect devices: (A) the game effect lamp 9, (B) the image display device 5, and (C) the movable member 35. In the setting of the re-variation effect pattern determination table 165, when the re-change effect that combines the three types of effect devices is executed, compared to the case where the re-change effect is executed only by the game effect lamp 9, the big hit reliability or Super reach reliability is getting higher. By doing so, it is possible to notify the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, etc. according to the effect mode of the re-variation effect, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. .

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes a light emitting body such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs, operation buttons 32, and movable members included in the effect item. In order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component) including a plurality of types, pattern data constituting the production control pattern is stored in advance. Such an effect control pattern may include, for example, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a continuous effect control pattern, a hit effect control pattern, and the like.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and for every variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, each of the plurality of notice effect control patterns is prepared in advance to execute a plurality of continuous effect patterns prepared in advance to execute the notice effect of “step-up notice” or a notice effect of “button notice”. In response to any of a plurality of continuous production patterns, a plurality of continuous production patterns prepared in advance to execute the notice of “movable object notice”, the display position and size of the production image, an update display procedure, It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting of an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation action on the operation button 32, and setting of switching of an effect operation when an operation is detected.

  The win-time effect control pattern indicates the control contents of the effect operation in the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. The special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, May be prepared in advance according to the presence / absence of promotion effect during the big hit.

  FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of such various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 20A, the effect control pattern includes various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of process data serving as control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the lighting operation of the light emitter. In the operation detection control data, for example, an operation operation period using the operation buttons 32, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation buttons 32, data for designating the control content of the effect operation when the operation buttons are detected effectively, and the like. Is included. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Further, for example, various other control data such as movable member control data indicating an operation mode of the movable member included in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 20B shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the operation button 32 during the operation effective period specified by the detection control data and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 21 is provided in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 21 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate sound and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from the power supply board 16 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 22 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S202).

  When the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), it is provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S203; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S204).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S202 and S204, the CPU 103 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S205). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S205 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S206). At this time, if the read value in step S205 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, when it is determined in step S201 that the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, and in step S206, it is determined that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the first special symbol. A first start condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the display device 4A and variable display of decorative symbols is established. If it is determined in step S203 that the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, and if it is determined in step S206 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the second special symbol. A second start condition is established for executing a special game using the second special figure by the display device 4B and a variable display of decorative symbols.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S208).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S208, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S209). Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, whereby each random number value is stored (step S210). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random value is stored in step S210, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed (step S211). Subsequently, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S212). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; Yes), after executing the process of step S212, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S213; Yes), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214), and then shown in FIG. The process proceeds to step S203. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S213; No), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends.

  25 and 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the winning specific pattern determination process executed in step S211 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 23, FIG. 28) described later. ”Or a jackpot type is determined, and in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 23, FIG. 29) described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211 at the timing at which the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, and whether or not the decorative pattern variation pattern is a variation pattern with at least super reach. Thus, it is predicted that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, and based on this prediction result, On the control board 12 side, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuous effect.

  In the winning specific pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S350A in FIG. 25). Here, if the start port buffer value is “1” in step S367 (step S350A; “1”), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set. It is determined whether or not (step S350B). The time reduction flag is set to the on state when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state when the probability change state or the time reduction state ends. More specifically, after the hour / hour flag is set to ON in the process of ending the big hit gaming state, the hour / hour count count value has reached “0”, and the special figure display result is “big hit”. Corresponding to the end of the game, the time reduction flag is cleared and the game is turned off.

  If the hourly flag is OFF in step S350B (step S350B; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is set is set (step S350C). The big hit flag is set to the on state when the big hit gaming state is controlled, and is cleared to the off state when the big hit gaming state ends. Here, if the big hit flag is off (step S350C; No), or if it is determined in step S350A that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S350A; “2”), A special figure display result corresponding to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 24 is specified (step S351). For example, in the process of step S351, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set in the usage table. Here, when setting to the use table, for example, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM 101 may be set to a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 extracted in step S209 is specified. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. Specify whether the result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Here, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is specified by referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the special figure display result determination table 130. That's fine.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result specified in step S351 is “lost” (step S352). At this time, if the specified special figure display result is “losing” (step S352; Yes), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 of FIG. 24 is “220” to “238. It is determined whether it is within the range of “” (step S353).

  Here, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. If the random number value MR3 is within the range of “220” to “238”, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories, and the variation pattern without the reach effect ( The variation pattern type CA1-3 including the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern) is determined.

  When it is determined in step S353 that the random value MR3 is within the range of “220” to “238” (step S353; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S354). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S354; “1”), a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first reach winning is within the common range of the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern; The first winning determination result notification command B100H (see FIG. 5C) is set to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S355), and then a specific pattern determination process at winning is performed. Exit.

  When it is determined in step S354 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S354; “2”), it is notified that the non-reach-losing quasi-continuous variation pattern common range is within the second starting prize. After setting for transmitting the fifth prize determination result notification command B200H (see FIG. 5C), which is the second start opening prize designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S356). ), The winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S353 that the random value MR3 is not within the range of “220” to “238” (step S353; No), the random number value for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 of FIG. It is determined whether MR3 is within the range of “239” to “251” (step S357).

  Here, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. If the random value MR3 is within the range of “239” to “251”, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories, and the variation pattern (reach loss) with the reach effect is executed. The variation pattern type CA2-2 or CA2-3 including the quasi-continuous variation pattern) is determined.

  When it is determined in step S357 that the random number MR3 is within the range of “239” to “251” (step S357; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S358). If the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S358; “1”), the second starting port winning designation command is used to notify that the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern is within the common range at the first starting winning. After setting for transmitting the first winning determination result notification command B101H (see FIG. 5C) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S359), the winning specific pattern determining process is performed. finish. When it is determined in step S358 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S358; “2”), the second start winning prize is notified that it is within the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. (2) After setting for transmitting the sixth winning determination result notification command B201H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening winning designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S360). Then, the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S357 that the random value MR3 is not within the range of “239” to “251” (step S357; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S361). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S361; “1”), the first start port for notifying that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed at the time of the first start winning. After a setting is made to transmit a fourth prize determination result notification command B103H (see FIG. 5C) as a prize designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S362), at the time of winning The specific pattern determination process ends. If it is determined in step S350A that the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S350A; “1”), and the time-short flag or big hit flag is on (step S350B or S350C; Yes), The process of specifying the special figure display result and the process of determining the variation pattern from the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type (steps S351 to S353) are skipped, the process proceeds to step S362, and the fourth winning determination result notification command B103H Is set to transmit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Thus, in this embodiment, the determination for the first start winning is not performed during execution of the time reduction control (during high base) or during the big hit gaming state.

  When it is determined in step S361 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S361; “2”), the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed at the time of the second start winning. A setting is made to transmit an eighth winning determination result notification command B203H (see FIG. 5C), which is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying this, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step S363), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S352; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “probable” (step S365). If the big hit type is not “probable” (step S365; No), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 in FIG. 24 is within the range of “50” to “99”. It is determined whether or not (step S366).

  In the setting example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A, if the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination is within the range of “50” to “99”, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the jackpot type, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, and the variable display result is determined to be the fluctuation pattern type CA3-2 including the fluctuation pattern of “big hit”.

  If the random value MR3 is within the range of “50” to “99” (step S366; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S367 in FIG. 26). ). Here, if the starting port buffer value is “1” in step S367 (step S367; “1”), the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed at the first start winning, and the variable display result is “ A third prize determination result notification command B102H (see FIG. 5C), which is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that “big hit” is to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 After the setting (step S368), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. If it is determined in step S367 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S367; “2”), the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed and variable display is performed at the time of the second start winning prize. A seventh prize determination result notification command B202H (see FIG. 5C), which is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the result is “big hit”, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. After performing the setting for performing (Step S369), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. When it is determined in step S365 that the big hit type is “surprise” (step S365; Yes), or when it is determined in step S366 that the random value MR3 is not within the range of “50” to “99” ( Step S366; Yes), the process proceeds to step S361 described above.

  By executing the specific pattern determination process at the time of winning, when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected, the game state or special figure game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suspended. Regardless of the total number of stored storages as a memory number, a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and a variation pattern without a reach effect. It is possible to specify whether or not the first starting port winning designation command and the second starting port winning designation command which differ depending on the specified result are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, a process for determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 28, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), the total pending storage count is updated by 1 by subtracting 1 from the total pending storage count count, for example. (Step S232).

  Following the processing of step S232, for example, whether or not the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the second reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S233). When it is determined in step S233 that the second reserved memory number count value is “0” (step S233; Yes), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed. In response to the establishment of the first start condition to be started, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S234). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S233 that the second reserved memory number count value is other than “0” (step S233; No), the special symbol using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In response to the establishment of the second start condition for starting the figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S235).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S235, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S236). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the special figure display result determination result is used as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are respectively read out. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the special figure display is performed as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR1 to MR3 read out in this way is temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example, by storing it in a special figure changing random value buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Just do it.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by 1, and the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is used from the holding number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S237). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1 and the storage contents of the reserved data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is Shift one entry up.

  Following the processing of step S237, a special figure display is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is a variable symbol display result, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S238). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S237 is “big hit” or “small Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S239). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is “big hit” (step S240).

  If it is determined in step S240 that the game is a “hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S241). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type read in step S236, such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change” in advance. A plurality of jackpot types prepared are determined (step S243). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S235, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. The jackpot type is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value that is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( Step S244). As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S240 that it is not “big hit” (step S240; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S245). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S245; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S246).

  If it is determined in step S245 that it is not “small hit” (step S245; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S244 and S246, is it controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S247). As an example, if it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the result is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the winning symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S243. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S247, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S248), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types (step S261). S262). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set (step S264). S266).

  When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S266 (step S266; No), it is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more (step S267). If the total reserved storage number is less than “3” (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is on in step S266 (step S266; Yes), or when the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the fluctuation occurs. A loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of pattern types (step S269). Even when the time reduction flag is on in step S266, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. You may choose. For example, when the hourly flag is on, if the total reserved memory number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S268 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, while the total reserved memory number If the value is “1” or more, the process may proceed to step S269 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, S268, and S269, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the special figure variation random value buffer or the like. By referring to the use table set in any one of S263, S265, S268, and S269, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S270). Here, in the process of step S270, the variation pattern type determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like when detecting the start winning and stored as the hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is performed. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. In the setting of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 8C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 8D, the variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is displayed. Regardless of whether or not is shortened, a determined value within a common range is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Accordingly, the variable display time has been shortened when the start winning is detected, but even when the variable display time is not shortened at the time of executing the processing of step S270, the range of the specific pattern common range when the start winning is detected. Can be matched with the determination result of the variation pattern type by the processing of step S270, and the non-reach losing pseudo-variable pattern common range or the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern when detecting the start winning Prevents a variation pattern type that is different from a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed from being determined to be within the common range. it can. Also, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display device 4A determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, or the second start Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, a common random counter, etc. Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type updated by the above, the common processing module can determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S270, the loss variation pattern determination table 133A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit”. One of the tables 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S271). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S271 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S272). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S272 is executed, or may be the first start prize. The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a game ball that has entered the mouth or the second start winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S272, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as any of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S272, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S270, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S273). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S274). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S274, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S275). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S275 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 22 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S276), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 22 is executed after the special symbol stop process is finished, the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is executed. Is sent. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in the process of step S295, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the probability variation flag and the short time flag to turn off, a process of clearing the short time counter for counting the number of remaining special game games in the short time state, and the like. Just do it. Subsequently, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S304). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is to be terminated (step S303), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control in the time reduction state may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. It should be noted that for the probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the probability variation state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that the time reduction control ends. In this way, when the time reduction control is ended, the probability variation control may be terminated at the same time, so that the normal state may be obtained. It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

  In the process of step S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control end, for example, in step S231 shown in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermined) the special figure display result in step S240.

  FIG. 31A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 31 (A), the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 23, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the presentation waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Then, the setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the read value in step S312 is performed (step S313). FIG. 31B shows a setting example in step S313. As shown in FIG. 31 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Set to the counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1” or “2”, a setting for starting control for changing the gaming state to the probable change state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  After the setting in step S313, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is cleared to the off state (step S315), the special figure process flag is cleared, and the value is initialized to “0”. (Step S314), the jackpot ending process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 16 or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 32 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and among the effect random numbers used for effect control, numerical data indicating a random number value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is displayed as software. Update with Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, the effect control process process is executed (step S406), and the process returns to step S402. In the effect control process in step S406, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and an effect object Regarding the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation of the movable member provided, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  In the command analysis process in step S405, for example, a command process at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the start winning command processing, when the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “pseudo-continuous”. It is a variation pattern in which the variable display effect is executed, and it is determined whether or not a reach effect is involved, and whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. In the start winning command process shown in FIG. 33A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501). The received effect control command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and confirms the contents, thereby receiving the received effect control command. A control command can be specified.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening prize designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the first starting opening prize designation command, the first start opening prize designation command is executed. It is determined whether or not this is a determination result notification command at the time of the fourth winning (step S502). At this time, if it is the fourth winning determination result notification command (step S502; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the value of the first variation number counter (first variation number count value) provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Thus, the update is performed (step S503).

  After executing the process of step S503, the display update setting corresponding to the first start opening prize is set (step S504), and the start winning command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S504, the first one based on the detection of a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a green circular display is performed in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the first start opening winning designation command is not the fourth winning determination result notification command (step S502; No), the variable display result in the reserved storage is other than “non-reach”. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the fourth winning determination result notification command or the eighth winning determination result notification command (step S505). . If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S505; No), it is determined whether or not the first variation count value is “0” (step S506). If there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the pending storage (step S505; Yes), or if the first variation count value is “0” (step S506; Yes), a description will be given later. The process proceeds to step S510.

  When it is determined in step S506 that the first variation number count value is other than “0” (step S507; No), according to the setting of FIG. The determination result buffer value (winning determination result buffer value) is set (step S507), and updated by adding 1 to the first variation count value (step S508), and then the continuous effect start setting process is executed. (Step S509).

  If it is determined in step S505 that there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S505; Yes), or the first variation count value is “0” in step S506. If it is determined (step S506; Yes), after executing the processing of step S509, the display update setting corresponding to the first start opening winning is set (step S510), and the start winning command is set. The process ends. For example, in the process of step S510, the first by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). In accordance with the establishment of the start condition, display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H to a green circular display is performed.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S511). At this time, if the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S511; No), the start winning command processing is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S511 that the second start opening prize designation command has been received (step S511; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the second start opening prize designation command, the second start opening prize designation command is performed. It is determined whether or not this is a determination result notification command at the time of eighth winning (step S512). At this time, if it is an eighth winning determination result notification command (step S512; Yes), for example, it is updated by adding 1 to the second variation count value provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S513). ).

  After executing the process of step S513, after setting the display update corresponding to the second start opening winning (step S514), the start winning command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S514, the second by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue circular display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  When it is determined in step S512 that the second start opening winning designation command is not the eighth winning determination result notification command (step S512; No), the variable display result in the reserved storage is other than “non-reach”. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a pending storage corresponding to receiving a command other than the fourth winning determination result notification command or the eighth winning determination result notification command (step S515). . If there is no variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S515; No), it is determined whether or not the second variation count value is “0” (step S516).

  When it is determined in step S516 that the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S516; No), the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided according to the setting of FIG. The value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value) is set (step S517), and updated by adding 1 to the second variation count value (step S518), and then the continuous production start setting process Is executed (step S519).

  If it is determined in step S515 that there is a variable display result other than “non-reach” in the hold storage (step S515; Yes), the second variation count value is “0” in step S516. When it is determined that there is (Step S516; Yes), after executing the process of Step S519, the display update corresponding to the second start opening winning is set (Step S520), and then the start winning command processing Exit. For example, in the process of step S520, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is detected by the second game ball that has entered the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to a blue circular display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  34, 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing an example of the continuous effect start setting process executed in steps S509 and S519 of FIG. In the continuous production start setting process shown in FIGS. 34, 35 and 36, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first continuous production flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is on. Determination is made (step S701 in FIG. 34). It should be noted that the first continuous effect flag is set when, for example, step S711 shown in FIG. 35 is started when the execution of the continuous effect is started based on the winning determination result buffer value being “1” to “3”. When the continuous production is finished, for example, in step S577 shown in FIG. 44, it is cleared and turned off.

  When the first continuous effect flag is off in step S701 (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is turned on ( Step S702). Note that the second continuous effect flag is set when the execution of the continuous effect is started based on the winning determination result buffer value being “5” to “7”, for example, step S714 shown in FIG. When the continuous production is finished, for example, in step S577 shown in FIG. 44, it is cleared and turned off.

  When the second continuous production in-process flag is OFF in step S702 (step S702; No), the continuous production pattern type determination is performed as a use table for determining whether or not to start the continuous production and the continuous production pattern type. The table 160 is selected and set (step S704).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S704, numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type is extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S705). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 extracted in step S705, by referring to the continuous effect pattern type determination table 160 set in step S704, whether or not to start the continuous effect, and the continuous effect pattern The type is determined (step S706). At this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S706 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S707). When it is determined in step S707 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (step S707; No), the continuous effect start setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S707 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S707; Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or less (step S708 in FIG. 35). At this time, if the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or less (step S708; Yes), the first variation count value is set as the initial count value in the continuous effect counter (step S709), and then the first variation. The count value is initialized by setting “0” (step S710). Further, the first continuous production in-progress flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S711).

  If it is determined in step S708 that the winning determination result buffer value is larger than “3” (step S708; No), the second variation count value is set as the initial count value in the continuous effect counter ( In step S712), the second variation count value is set to “0” and initialized (step S713). Further, the second continuous production in-progress flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S714).

  After the process of step S711 or S714 is performed, the first continuous production pattern determination corresponding to the continuous production pattern type determined in step S706 is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous production patterns. The table 161A or 162A is selected and set (step S715). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 for determining the first continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S716). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 extracted in step S716, the first continuous effect pattern is determined by referring to the first continuous effect pattern determination table 161A or 162A set in step S715. (Step S717).

  After executing the process of step S717, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect count value is 3 or more (step S718). Here, it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect is executed. If the continuous effect count value is 3 or more (step S718; Yes), the continuous effect pattern type determined in step S706 as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous effect patterns, or at the time of winning a prize The second continuous performance pattern determination tables 161B, 161D, 161F or 162B, 162D, 162F corresponding to the determination result buffer value are selected and set (step S719). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-2 for determining the second continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S720). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S720, by referring to the second continuous effect pattern determination tables 161B, 161D, 161F or 162B, 162D, 162F set in step S719, A second continuous production pattern is determined (step S721).

  After executing the process of step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect count value is 4 (step S722). Here, it is determined whether or not the third continuous effect is executed. If the continuous effect count value is 4 (step S722; Yes), the continuous effect pattern type determined in step S706 and the determination at the time of winning are used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous effect patterns. The third continuous effect pattern determination tables 161C, 161E, 161G or 162C, 162E, 162G corresponding to the result buffer value are selected and set (step S723). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern is extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S724). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-3 extracted in step S724, by referring to the third continuous effect pattern determination tables 161C, 161E, 161G or 162C, 162E, 162G set in step S723, A third continuous effect pattern is determined (step S725).

  If the continuous effect count value is less than 3 in step S718 (step S718; No), or if the continuous effect count value is not 4 in step S722 (step S722; No), after the process of step S725, for example, continuous By storing data indicating an identification number or the like that can identify the effect pattern in the continuous effect pattern buffer included in the effect control buffer 194, the determination result of the continuous effect pattern in steps S717, S721, and S725 is stored. (Step S726).

  After the process of step S726, the movable object notice effect start determination table 163 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to start the moveable object notice effect (step S731).

  Subsequent to the process of step S731, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the start of the moving object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S732). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 extracted in step S732, it is determined whether or not to start the movable object notice effect by referring to the movable object notice effect start determination table 163 set in step S731. (Step S733). At this time, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S733 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S734). When it is determined in step S734 that the movable object notice effect is not to be executed (step S734; No), the process proceeds to step S746 described later.

  When it is determined in step S734 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S734; Yes), the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of movable object notice effect patterns. Is selected and set (step S735). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first movable object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S736). Based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4-1 extracted in step S736, the first movable object notice effect pattern is referred to by referring to the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S735. Is determined (step S737).

  After performing the process of step S737, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect count value is 3 or more (step S738). Here, it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect is executed. If the continuous effect count value is 3 or more (step S738; Yes), the second movable object corresponding to the winning determination result buffer value is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of movable object notice effect patterns. The notice effect pattern determination tables 164B, 164D, and 164F are selected and set (step S739). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second movable object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S740). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 extracted in step S740, the second movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164B, 164D, and 164F set in step S739 are referred to, so that the second possibility is obtained. An animal notice effect pattern is determined (step S741).

  After executing the process of step S741, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect count value is 4 (step S742). Here, it is determined whether or not the third continuous effect is executed. If the continuous effect count value is 4 (step S742; Yes), the third movable object advance notice corresponding to the winning determination result buffer value is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of movable object advance notice effect patterns. The effect pattern determination tables 164C, 164E, 164G are selected and set (step S743). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR4-3 for determining the third movable object notice effect is extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S744). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR4-3 extracted in step S744, the third movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164C, 164E, and 164G set in step S743 are referred to to determine whether the third time. An animal notice effect pattern is determined (step S745).

  If it is determined in step S734 that the movable object notice effect is not executed (step S734; No), if the continuous effect count value is less than 3 in step S738 (step S738; No), the continuous effect count is determined in step S742. If the value is not 4 (step S742; No), after the process of step S745, for example, the movable object provided with the data indicating the identification number or the like that can identify the movable object notice effect pattern is provided in the effect control buffer 194. The determination result of the movable object notice effect pattern in steps S737, S741, and 745 is stored by storing it in the notice effect pattern buffer (step S746). Then, the winning determination result buffer value is initialized to “0” (step S747), and the continuous effect start setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a start winning memory display process (step S159). The start winning memory display process includes a process for performing display control in the start winning memory display area 5H according to the display settings performed in steps S504, S510, S514, and S520 of FIG.

  After executing the start winning memory display process in step S159, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following processes in steps S160 to S166 are performed. Select one of them and execute it.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the image display device 5 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various presentation operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbol, temporary stop symbol, etc., which are the final stop symbols, are determined according to the variation pattern and variable display results. Processing is included. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation setting process, there is a variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the processing of updating the effect image in the continuous effect and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in which the variable display result is “losing”. A process for performing a setting for interrupting the continuous effect based on the start, and a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special game using the first special figure during the interruption of the continuous effect. Decorative design corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in which the process for performing the setting for resuming the continuous production based on the game, and the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” In addition, a process for making a setting for ending the continuous production based on the start of the variable display is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern and a notice effect control pattern are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, warning effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, when the special figure display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4”. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit control effect processing, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the lamp 9 and the decoration LED is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hitting control effect process, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying on the display screen, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various effect operations in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And a process for controlling various effect operations corresponding to the end of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a continuous effect setting process (step S551). FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process during continuous effect executed in step S551. In the setting process during continuous production shown in FIG. 39, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the production interruption flag is on (step S631). The production interruption flag is based on receiving the second variation start command for designating that the variable display result is “lost” when the first continuous production flag is on, for example, step S636. When the first variation start command is received after that, for example, in step S638, it is cleared and turned off.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the production interruption flag is off (step S631; No), it is determined whether or not the first continuous production flag is on (step S632). At this time, if the first continuous effect flag is on (step S632; Yes), it is determined whether a second variation start command is received from the main board 11 (step S633).

  When it is determined in step S633 that the second variation start command has been received (step S633; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display result designated by the second variation start command is “lost” (step S633). S634). At this time, if the variable display result is not “losing” (step S634; No), a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed (step S635). For example, in the process of step S635, the continuous effect pattern buffer is cleared and the storage of the continuous effect pattern is deleted, and the continuous effect number counter is cleared and the continuous effect count value is initialized to “0”. Further, in response to the end of the continuous effect, the first continuous effect flag may be cleared and turned off.

  When it is determined in step S634 that the variable display result is “losing” (step S634; Yes), the production interruption flag is set to the on state (step S636), and the continuous production setting process is terminated. .

  When it is determined in step S631 that the production interruption flag is on (step S631; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first variation start command is received from the main board 11 (step S637). At this time, if the first variation start command has not been received (step S637; No), the setting process during continuous production is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S637 that the first variation start command has been received (step S637; Yes), the production interruption flag is cleared and turned off (step S638), and then the continuous production setting process is terminated.

  After executing the continuous production setting process as described above in step S551 in FIG. 38, the final stop symbol determination process is executed (step S552). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S552. In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result becomes “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S751). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S751; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is then determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S752).

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; Yes), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S753), The final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S753, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; No), a final decorative symbol combination that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S754), and the final The stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S754, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S751 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S751; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S755). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S755; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ After determining the combination of the determined decorative symbols that will be the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “Small hit” (step S756), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. . As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 by referring to the above. Further, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as in step S754, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S755; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination After determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the symbols (step S757), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S757, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  After the final stop symbol determination process as described above is executed in step S552 of FIG. 38, the variable display effect setting process is executed (step S553). FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S514. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first performs “slip” according to the change pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not it is “with slip” that executes the variable display effect of “” (step S771).

  If it is determined in step S771 that there is “slip” (step S771; Yes), a decorative symbol that is a pre-slip temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped in the “slip” variable display effect is determined (step S772). As an example, in the process of step S772, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The decorative symbol that becomes the temporary stop symbol before slip may be determined by referring to a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table.

  When it is determined in step S771 that there is no “slip” (step S771; No), after executing the process of step S772, for example, the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is read. In accordance with the variation pattern specified in the above, it is determined whether or not the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is executed (step S773). At this time, if it is determined that there is “pseudo-continuous” (step S773; Yes), the decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and constitutes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 A symbol is determined (step S774). As an example, in the process of step S774, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pseudo-continuous chance updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance determination table, etc., every time a pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is executed, a temporary stop display is performed and a decorative pattern constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 is determined. do it.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S774, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the revariation effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S775). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S775, the re-variation effect pattern is determined by referring to the re-change effect pattern determination table 165 (step S776). Here, the determination result of the re-variation effect pattern is obtained by storing data indicating an identification number or the like that can identify the determined re-change effect pattern in the re-change effect pattern buffer included in the effect control buffer 194. Remember me.

  When it is determined in step S773 that it is not “there is pseudo-continuity” (step S773; No), the variable display effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  After executing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S553 of FIG. 38, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S555). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Also, any one of a plurality of continuous production control patterns prepared corresponding to the continuous production pattern, the movable object notice production pattern, etc. determined in the continuous production start setting process of FIGS. 34, 35 and 36 is selected. Set as usage pattern. If the production interruption flag is on, the set of continuous production control patterns only needs to be skipped, and the continuous production control pattern set is skipped in this way, thereby reducing processing by the program. be able to. Further, one of a plurality of re-variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the re-change effect pattern determined in the variable display effect setting process in step S553 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Following the processing of step S555, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S556). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S557). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S555 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S558), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect suspension flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S560). At this time, if the production interruption flag is off (step S560; Yes), continuous production execution processing is performed (step S561).

  If it is determined in step S560 that the flag indicating that the production is interrupted is ON (step S560; Yes), or after the continuous production execution process is executed in step S561, the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction). ) (Step S562), the updated effect control process timer value is compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the effect control pattern, and it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values. Is performed (step S563). And if it does not correspond to any timer determination value (step S563; No), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S563 (step S563; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S564). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S563 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S564. In step S564, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S565). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S565; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S564 (step S566), the decorative symbol variation End the middle process.

  For example, in the rendering operation control by the process of step S566, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a command corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is issued. Of the transmission to the audio control board 13 and the output of the signal specified by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, a part or all of them may be performed sequentially or in parallel (if only one operation is performed). If done alone). In addition, in the effect operation control by the process of step S566, whether or not it is an operation effective period in which the operation action of the player or the like on the operation unit 30 is effectively detected based on the operation detection control data read out in step S564. Determine. At this time, if the operation is valid, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the player's operation on the operation unit 30 has been detected. And when operation with respect to the operation part 30 is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation unit 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation on the operation unit 30 is performed, for example, by changing to an effect control pattern specified by the operation detection control data. It is only necessary to perform control or setting for changing the rendering operation in response to the above.

  If it is determined in step S565 that it is an end code (step S565; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the production control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S567). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (step S568), and then the process during the decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous effect execution process executed in step S561 of FIG. In the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a step-up notice based on, for example, a continuous effect control pattern (step S591). When it is determined that the step-up notice is to be executed (step S591; Yes), in accordance with the continuous effect control pattern, continuous effect display corresponding to the continuous effect pattern is performed on the display screen in the image display device 5 (step S595).

  When it is determined in step S591 that the step-up notice is not to be executed (step S591; No), for example, based on the continuous effect control pattern, it is determined whether or not the button notice is to be executed (step S593).

  When it is determined in step S592 that the button notice is to be executed (step S592; Yes), for example, an effect image such as a message image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 according to the continuous effect control pattern (for example, “Press the button! "!" Is displayed, and a lamp built in the operation button 32 is turned on to execute a button operation promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the operation button 32 (step S593).

  After executing the button operation promotion effect, it is determined whether or not an operation of the operation button 32 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 (step S594). If the operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S594; Yes), the continuous display corresponding to the continuous effect pattern is performed on the display screen in the image display device 5 according to the continuous effect control pattern (step S595).

  If the operation of the operation button 32 is not detected in step S594 (step S; No), it is determined whether the operation valid period has ended (step S595). If the operation valid period has ended (step S596; Yes), an effect end display such as erasing characters on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S596).

  After the process of step S597 or the process of step S596 is completed, or when it is determined in step S595 that the operation valid period is not over (step S595; No), for example, based on the continuous effect control pattern, the movable object notice is given. It is determined whether or not to execute (step S598). When it is determined that the movable object notice is to be executed (step S598; Yes), the continuous effect operation corresponding to the movable object notice effect pattern is performed in the movable member 35 according to the continuous effect control pattern (step S599). Thereafter, the continuous effect execution process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decoration symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the final decoration symbol, which is the final stop symbol, as a complete stop display and displays it (step S571). If a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed until the decorative symbol stop command is received. The temporary stop display may be performed so that, for example, the decorative pattern fluctuation display is performed at 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Following the processing in step S571, it is determined whether or not the first continuous rendering flag provided in the rendering control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S572). At this time, if the first continuous effect flag is off (step S572; No), it is determined whether or not the second continuous effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S573). ).

  If it is determined in step S572 that the first continuous effect flag is on (step S572; Yes), or if it is determined in step S573 that the second continuous effect flag is on (step S573; Yes), it is determined whether or not the production interruption flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S574). At this time, if the production interruption flag is off (step S574; No), after the continuous production count value is updated by subtracting 1 (step S575), the updated continuous production count value is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S576).

  At this time, if the continuous effect count value is “0” (step S576; Yes), a setting for ending the continuous effect is performed (step S577). For example, in the process of step S577, the continuous effect pattern buffer is cleared and the storage of the continuous effect pattern is deleted. Further, in response to the end of the continuous effect, the first continuous effect flag or the second continuous effect flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  When the continuous effect count value is other than “0” in step S576 (step S576; No), after executing the process of step S577, for example, it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command is received, When it is received, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command (step S578). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S578; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit control production processing. (Step S579), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S578; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit control. (Step S581), the decorative symbol variation end processing is terminated. When it is determined in step S580 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S580; No), the value of the effect process flag is initialized to “0” (step S582), and the decoration symbol variation ends. End time processing.

  When the second continuous production flag is off at step S573 (step S573; No), or when the production interruption flag is on at step S574 (step S574; Yes), the first variation count value is set. It is determined whether or not it is “0” (step S583). If the first variation count value is “0” (step S583; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second variation count value is “0” (step S584). If the first variation count value or the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S583 or S584; No), it is determined whether or not the current variation corresponds to the variation of the first special figure. (Step S585). For example, a reserved storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is updated every time a first start opening prize designation command is received or a second start opening prize designation command is received. And remember. In step S585, it is determined whether or not the current variation corresponds to the variation of the first special figure by checking the reserved storage unit. If the current fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation of the first special figure, the first reserved memory number in the holding memory unit is subtracted by 1. If the current fluctuation does not correspond to the fluctuation of the first special figure, The second reserved memory number in the reserved memory unit is updated by 1.

  If it is determined in step S585 that the current variation corresponds to the first special figure (step S585; Yes), the first variation count value is updated by 1 (step S586). If it is determined in step S585 that the current variation corresponds to the second special figure (step S585; No), the second variation count value is updated by 1 (step S587).

  When the second variation count value is “0” in step S584 (step S54; Yes), when the process of step S586 or S587 is completed, the process proceeds to step S578. It should be noted that the process of updating the first variation count value or the second variation count value in steps S583 to S587 is executed at the start of decoration symbol variation (for example, in the ornament symbol variation setting process in step S161). Also good.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball that has entered (started winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, or the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. When a game ball that enters (starts winning) is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 of FIG. Based on this, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed in step S211. Then, if it is determined in step S353 in FIG. 25 that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “220” to “238” (step S353; Yes), at the time of the first start winning prize Based on the transmission setting in step S355, a first prize determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Is transmitted. Also, at the time of the second start winning, a fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range based on the transmission setting in step S356 is sent from the main board 11. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S357 that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “239” to “251” (step S357; Yes), based on the transmission setting in step S359. A second winning determination result notification command for notifying that the random value MR3 is within the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S352; No), and in step S366 in FIG. 26, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “50” to “ If it is determined that it is within the range of “99” (step S366; Yes), based on the transmission setting in step S368, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed at the time of the first start winning, and variable display is performed. A third prize determination result notification command for notifying that the result is “big hit” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the production control board 12, when it is determined in step S501 of FIG. 33 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S501; Yes), the first variation count value is set in step S503 or S508. Update by adding one. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S511 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S511; Yes), 1 is added to the second variation count value in step S513 or S518. To update.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received and it is determined that the first variation count value is other than “0” (step S506; No), step S507 is performed. The winning determination result buffer value corresponding to the winning determination result notification command is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S511 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received, and it is determined that the second variation count value is other than “0” (step S516; No). In step S517, the winning determination result buffer value corresponding to the winning determination result notification command is set.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 45A, in response to the first reserved storage number being “2”, the first variation count value is set to “2”, and the image display device When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5, the first start port switch 22A A third winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result will be “big hit” after the start winning game ball is detected and the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed from the main board 11 It is assumed that the data is transmitted to the control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, it is determined that the first start port winning designation command is received in step S501 of FIG. 33 (step S501; Yes), and the third winning determination result notification command is determined in step S502. Based on the determination (step S502; No), the determination that the first variation count value is “3” in step S506 (step S506; No), the winning determination result buffer value in step S507 Is set to "3", and is updated to "3" by adding 1 to the first variation count value "2" in step S509.

  Thereafter, in step S509, settings for starting a continuous effect are performed. Specifically, it is determined in step S701 in FIG. 34 that the first continuous effect flag is off (step S701; No), and in step S702, it is determined that the second continuous effect flag is off. Based on this (step S702; No), the continuous effect pattern type determination table 160 is referred to determine whether or not to start the continuous effect and the determination of the continuous effect pattern type (steps S704 to S706). Here, since the winning determination result buffer value is “3”, the decision to start the continuous effect is made at a higher rate than when “1” or “2”.

  Here, when the continuous effect pattern type is determined as the button notice (step S707; Yes), it is determined in step S708 in FIG. 35 that the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or less (step S708). Yes), after the first variation count value “3” is set as the initial count value in the continuous effect counter in step S709, the first continuous effect flag is set in the on state in step S711. Thereafter, the first continuous effect pattern (button notification message) is determined by referring to the first button advance notification continuous effect pattern determination table 162A corresponding to the continuous effect pattern type determined in step S706 (step S715). S717). Here, it is assumed that “CHANCE” is determined as the usage pattern.

  Subsequently, since the continuous effect count value is “3” (step S718; Yes), a second continuous effect pattern (button notice message) is obtained by referring to the second button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162F. Determined (steps S719 to S721). Here, it is assumed that “GOOD LUCK” is determined as the usage pattern. The determined continuous performance pattern is stored in step S726.

  At this time, in step S510 in FIG. 33, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H enters the first start winning opening (start winning). In response to the establishment of the first start condition based on the detection, the display setting for changing to the green circular display is performed. Then, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 37, in accordance with the display setting performed in step S510 of FIG. 33, for example, as shown in FIG. One of the displayed display parts is changed to a green circular display.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends, it is determined in step S574 of FIG. 44 that the effect suspension flag is off. Based on the above (Step S574; No), the continuous performance count value is decremented by 1 in Step S575, thereby being updated to “2”. When the first start condition is satisfied, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 37, the display part changed to the circular display is returned to non-display and, for example, as shown in FIG. One of the circular display parts different from the non-displayed display part (for example, the display part adjacent to the left of the non-displayed display part) is deformed and displayed in a circular shape.

  At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. In response to the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control substrate 12 starts variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Settings are made. Then, in step S555, the effect control board 12 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a use pattern. In response to the continuous production pattern stored in step S746, one of the plurality of continuous production control patterns prepared is selected and set as a use pattern.

  During this variable display, in response to executing the button announcement continuous effect, it is determined Yes in step S592 of FIG. 43, and the button operation promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. Step S593). Here, a message image “Press the button!” Is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Here, when the pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S594; Yes), as shown in FIG. 45 (E), “CHANCE” corresponding to the determination result of the continuous effect pattern of the first button notice is displayed. A notice message is displayed (step S597).

  Thereafter, when the variation time ends, the image display device 5 derives and displays the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative design ends.

  When the continuous effect count value becomes “1”, as shown in FIG. 45 (G), after the display part is returned to non-display, among the circular display parts different from the display part returned to non-display. The shape of one (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is displayed in a circle, and in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R The decoration pattern is changed.

  During this variable display, in response to executing the button announcement continuous effect, it is determined Yes in step S592 of FIG. 43, and the button operation promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 45 (H) ( Step S593). Here, a message image “Press the button!” Is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Here, when the pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected (step S594; Yes), as shown in FIG. 45 (I), “GOOD LUCK” corresponding to the determination result of the continuous effect pattern of the second button notice. Is displayed (step S597).

  Thereafter, when the variation time ends, the image display device 5 derives and displays the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination as shown in FIG. 45 (J), for example. The variable display of the decorative design ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), after the display part is returned to non-display, the decorative symbols change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is executed. This change is a change in which the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” that is the target of the advance notice by the continuous effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that PA 5-1 shown in FIG.

  Corresponding to the fact that GC5 is determined as the first pseudo-continuous chance and GC7 is determined as the second pseudo-continuous chance in step S774 of FIG. 41, as shown in FIG. The pseudo-continuous chance GC5 ("5, 5, 6") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first re-variation is executed as shown in FIG. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), the pseudo-continuous chance GC7 (“7 · 7 · 8”) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the first re-variation is executed. Is done. 46A to 46F, a re-variation effect corresponding to the re-variation effect pattern determined in step S776 of FIG. 41 is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (G), the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 46 (H), the reach effect is executed in which the reach mode is super reach. Thereafter, on the image display device 5, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (“7, 7, 7”) that is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is derived and displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (I), for example. This completes the variable display of the decorative symbols. Then, it shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  In this way, it is possible to foresee that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed by executing the continuous effect in the fluctuation before the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 47A, “2” is set as the first variation count value corresponding to the fact that the first reserved storage number is “2”. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen of the image display device 5, the first start port The third winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” after the game ball that has won the start by the switch 22A is detected and the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. It is assumed that the signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, it is determined that the first start port winning designation command is received in step S501 of FIG. 33 (step S501; Yes), and the third winning determination result notification command is determined in step S502. Based on the determination (step S502; No), the determination that the first variation count value is “3” in step S506 (step S506; No), the winning determination result buffer value in step S507 Is set to "3", and is updated to "3" by adding 1 to the first variation count value "2" in step S509.

  Thereafter, in step S509, settings for starting a continuous effect are performed. Specifically, it is determined in step S701 in FIG. 34 that the first continuous effect flag is off (step S701; No), and in step S702, it is determined that the second continuous effect flag is off. Based on this (step S702; No), the continuous effect pattern type determination table 160 is referred to determine whether or not to start the continuous effect and the determination of the continuous effect pattern type (steps S704 to S706). Here, since the winning determination result buffer value is “3”, the decision to start the continuous effect is made at a higher rate than when “1” or “2”.

  If the continuous performance pattern type is determined to be a step-up notice (step S707; Yes), it is determined in step S708 of FIG. 35 that the winning determination result buffer value is “3” or less (step). S708; Yes) After the first variation count value “3” is set in the continuous effect counter as a count initial value in step S709, the first continuous effect flag is set in the on state in step S711. Thereafter, the first continuous effect pattern is determined by referring to the first step-up notice continuous effect pattern determination table 161A corresponding to the continuous effect pattern type determined in step S706 (steps S715 to S717). Here, it is assumed that “first step” is determined as the usage pattern.

  Subsequently, since the continuous performance count value is “3” (step S718; Yes), the second continuous performance pattern is determined by referring to the second step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination table 161F ( Steps S719 to S721). Here, it is assumed that the “third step” is determined as the usage pattern. The determined continuous performance pattern is stored in step S726.

  Furthermore, when the decision to execute the movable object notice effect is made (step S734 in FIG. 36; Yes), the first movable object notice effect pattern is determined by referring to the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A. (Steps S735 to S737). Here, it is assumed that the “first mode” is determined as the usage pattern.

  Subsequently, since the continuous effect count value is “3” (step S738; Yes), the second movable object notice effect pattern is determined by referring to the second movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164F. (Steps S739 to S741). Here, it is assumed that the “second mode” is determined as the usage pattern. The determined movable object notice effect pattern is stored in step S746.

  At this time, in step S510 in FIG. 33, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H enters the first start winning opening (start winning). In response to the establishment of the first start condition based on the detection, the display setting for changing to the green circular display is performed. Then, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 37, in accordance with the display setting performed in step S510 of FIG. 33, for example, as shown in FIG. One of the displayed display parts is changed to a green circular display.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends, it is determined in step S574 of FIG. 44 that the effect suspension flag is off. Based on the above (Step S574; No), the continuous performance count value is decremented by 1 in Step S575, thereby being updated to “2”. Then, when the first start condition is satisfied, in the start winning memory display process of step S159 shown in FIG. 37, the display portion changed to the circular display is returned to non-display and, for example, as shown in FIG. One of the circular display parts different from the non-displayed display part (for example, the display part adjacent to the left of the non-displayed display part) is deformed and displayed in a circular shape.

  At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. In response to the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control substrate 12 starts variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Settings are made. Then, in step S555, the effect control board 12 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a use pattern. In response to the continuous production pattern stored in step S746, one of the plurality of continuous production control patterns prepared is selected and set as a use pattern.

  During this variable display, in response to executing the continuous effect of the step-up notice, it is determined Yes in step S591 in FIG. 43, and as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the first step-up notice is continued. One character image ST1 corresponding to the effect pattern “first step” is displayed (step S597). Here, an effect display is performed in which one character image ST1 appears from the right side of the image display device 5 and leaves on the left side.

  Further, in response to the execution of the movable object advance notice, “Yes” is determined in step S598 in FIG. 43, and as shown in FIG. 47D, the first movable object advance notice effect pattern “first” is displayed. Corresponding to “mode”, the movable member 35 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) (step S599).

  Thereafter, when the variation time ends, the image display device 5 derives and displays a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative design ends.

  When the continuous effect count value becomes “1”, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), after the display part is returned to non-display, the circular display part different from the display part returned to non-display is selected. The shape of one (for example, the display part on the left side of the display part that has returned to non-display) is displayed in a circle, and in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R The decoration pattern is changed.

  During this variable display, in response to executing the continuous effect of the step-up notice, it is determined Yes in step S591 in FIG. 43, and as shown in FIG. Three character images ST3 corresponding to the effect pattern “third step” are displayed (step S597). Here, an effect display is performed in which three character images ST3 appear from the right side of the image display device 5 and leave on the left side.

  Further, in response to executing the movable object advance notice, it is determined Yes in step S598 of FIG. 43, and as shown in FIG. Corresponding to “mode”, the movable member 35 rotates clockwise (clockwise) (step S599).

  Thereafter, when the variation time ends, the image display device 5 derives and displays, for example, a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination as shown in FIG. 47 (H). The variable display of the decorative design ends. After FIG. 47 (H), for example, an effect display after FIG. 46 (A) is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, when the continuous production is being executed, the game ball that has won the start with the second start port switch 22A is detected, and the second start port winning designation command is sent from the main board 11. When transmitted to the production control board 12, the production control board 12 determines that the production interruption flag is OFF in step S631 of FIG. 39 (step S631; No), and in step S632, Based on determining that the 1-continuous effect flag is on (step S632; Yes) and determining that the second start opening winning designation command is received in step S633 (step S633; Yes), the process proceeds to step S634. Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified by the second change start command is “losing”. At this time, when it is determined in step S634 that the variable display result is “losing” (step S634; Yes), in step S636, the effect suspension flag is set to the on state, so that step S637 is performed. 42, it is determined that the first variation designation command has been received, and the continuous effect execution process in step S561 in FIG. 42 is skipped until the effect suspension flag is cleared and turned off in step S638. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” (step S634; No), the continuous effect is ended in step S635. For this reason, the execution of continuous production is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuity in the continuous performance from being impaired, and it is possible to prevent the continuous performance from being out of order, so without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous performance, It is possible to prevent the continuous performance from becoming unnatural.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, it is determined at the time of starting winning, and before the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The notice effect of “button notice” is executed in the fluctuation. In the continuous production of “button notice”, the notice message is not displayed unless the player operates the operation button 32 (the notice effect is not executed), so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Also, as shown in FIG. 16, the continuous effect pattern depends on whether the display result of the variation in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is “big hit”, “reach lose”, or “non-reach lose”. The decision rate is different. As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is one. When the variable display result is “reach lose”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is once or twice. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is 1 to 3 times. Accordingly, the determination ratio of the continuous effect pattern is different in accordance with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of how many times the pseudo continuous variation is executed by the effect mode of the button notice. Further, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “220” to “251”, it is assumed that the variable pattern type for which the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed for both the normal use and the short time use. An effect corresponding to this can be executed. On the other hand, for variable pattern types for which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, the determination value is assigned differently depending on whether it is for normal use or for short-time use, so the variable display time can be adjusted. It becomes possible, and the situation where the operation rate of variable display falls can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, since the notice effect of the “button notice” can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations until the variable display effect of the “pseudo ream” is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained, The fun of gaming is improved.

  In addition, in the setting of the button notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 162A to 162G shown in FIGS. 16A to 16G, the big hit reliability and reach in the order of “...” <“CHANCE” <“GOOD LUCK” Although the reliability is high, the button notice with lower reliability than the previous button notice is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, it is determined at the time of starting winning, and the “step-up notice” is performed in the fluctuation before the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. ”Is executed. As shown in FIG. 15, the determination of the continuous effect pattern is made depending on whether the display result of the variation in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is “big hit”, “reach lose”, or “non-reach lose”. The ratio is different. As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is one. When the variable display result is “reach lose”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is once or twice. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is 1 to 3 times. Accordingly, the determination ratio of the continuous effect pattern is different in accordance with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. By doing in this way, the variation of the production increases such that the production mode of the step-up notice becomes different even at the same step, and the production effect and the interest of the game are improved. In addition, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation as to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation is executed by the effect form of the step-up notice. Further, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “220” to “251”, it is assumed that the variable pattern type for which the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed for both the normal use and the short time use. An effect corresponding to this can be executed. On the other hand, for variable pattern types for which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, the determination value is assigned differently depending on whether it is for normal use or for short-time use, so the variable display time can be adjusted. It becomes possible, and the situation where the operation rate of variable display falls can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, the notice effect of the “step-up notice” can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations until the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained. , The fun of gaming is improved.

  Further, in the setting of the step-up notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 161A to 161G shown in FIGS. 15A to 15G, the big hit is in the order of “first step” <“second step” <“third step”. Although the reliability and the reach reliability are high, the step-up notice having a lower reliability than the previous step-up notice is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  In the above embodiment, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, it is determined at the time of start winning, and the “movable object notice” is determined in the fluctuation before the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. ”Is executed. As shown in FIG. 18, the announcement effect pattern is determined depending on whether the display result of the variation in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is “big hit”, “reach lose”, or “non-reach lose”. The ratio is different. As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is one. When the variable display result is “reach lose”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is once or twice. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is 1 to 3 times. Accordingly, the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern is different in accordance with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. By executing an effect using the movable member 35 provided separately from the image display device 5, the effect of the effect is improved, and how many times the pseudo continuous variation is executed depending on the effect mode of the movable object notice Expectation can be improved. Further, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “220” to “251”, it is assumed that the variable pattern type for which the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed for both the normal use and the short time use. An effect corresponding to this can be executed. On the other hand, for variable pattern types for which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, the determination value is assigned differently depending on whether it is for normal use or for short-time use, so the variable display time can be adjusted. It becomes possible, and the situation where the operation rate of variable display falls can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, the notice effect of “movable object notice” can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations until the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained. , The fun of gaming is improved.

  Further, in the setting of the movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164G shown in FIGS. 18A to 18G, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are in the order of “first mode” <“second mode”. Although it is higher, the moving object notice with lower reliability than the previous moving object notice is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent giving a player the impression that reliability falls.

  In this embodiment, a re-variation effect is performed by combining three types of effect devices: the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the movable member 35. In the setting of the re-variation effect pattern determination table 165 shown in FIG. 19, when the re-change effect that combines three types of effect devices is executed, the big hit reliability and the super reach reliability become high. . By doing so, it is possible to notify the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, etc. according to the effect mode of the re-variation effect, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. .

  In this embodiment, after the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and some decorative symbols are displayed for the pseudo-continuous chance item. After changing the decorative pattern again in the area (for example, the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R), there may be an effect display in which the jackpot combination is finally stopped and displayed (PA6-1 in FIG. 7A). PA6-2 variation pattern "pseudo-ream + slip"). By doing in this way, the production can be surprising, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, only the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the big hit gaming state or during the execution of the short time control (high base state). The continuous production is not executed for the first start prize. As a result, while executing the continuous production as much as possible, the second display is performed during the execution of the continuous production started based on the determination that the variable display result of the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit”. By using the fact that the special figure is preferentially digested, the player intentionally establishes the second start condition and executes the special figure game using the second special figure, so that a big hit stock-like effect is executed. Can be reliably prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed by the first to eighth winning determination result notification commands, and the variable display result is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose” or “big hit” ”Is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and the notice control pattern (continuous effect) pattern is determined on the side of the effect control board 12 in accordance with the determination result at the time of winning. . A prize determination result notification command that can specify the number of times of execution of pseudo-continuous variation in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to correspond to the number of times of execution of pseudo-continuous fluctuation. Thus, a notice effect (continuous effect) pattern may be determined on the effect control board 12 side. In this case, as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations increases, it is not always necessary to increase the reach and the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit”, and the reach increases as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations increases. In addition, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” may be lowered.

  In the above embodiment, the process for determining the movable object notice in steps S731 to S746 in FIG. 35 is executed later, and the process for determining the button notice or step up notice in steps S715 to S726 in FIG. In addition to the button notice or the step-up notice, the movable object notice may be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process of steps S731 to S746 may be executed after steps S509 and S519 in FIG. 33 so that the movable object notice can be executed even when the button notice or the step-up notice is not executed. Good.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, “step-up notice”, “button notice” The notice effect of “movable object notice” is not executed. However, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the notice effect may be executed.

  In steps S353 and S357 in FIG. 25 and in step S366 in FIG. 26, whether or not the random pattern MR3 is compared with a specific numerical value to determine whether or not it is a variation pattern type in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. However, this determination may be made by referring to the variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132C, and 132D shown in FIG.

  Further, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. If the determined value of “238” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “220” to “238”, the gaming state and the total pending storage Regardless of the number, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and it is determined that it is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variable pattern common range without the reach effect, but the change pattern type CA1-3 Of the determined values for, only a predetermined range may be common. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values “220” to “238” are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-3, while the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening). In 132D, settings are made so that determined values “220” to “228” are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-3. In this case, in step S353 in FIG. 25, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “220” to “228”, it is determined that it is within the non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. You can do it.

  Further, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. The determined value of “251” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-2 or CA2-3 including the variation pattern (reach-losing pseudo-variable variation pattern) accompanied by the reach production when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. If the random number MR3 for determining the pattern type is within the range of “239” to “251”, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories, with a reach effect. Although it has been determined that the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern is within the common range, the determination is made for the variation pattern type CA2-2 or CA2-3. Only within a predetermined range may be common among. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values “239” to “251” are assigned to the variation pattern types CA2-3, while the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening). In 132D, settings are made so that determined values of “239” to “245” are assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-2. In this case, in step S357 in FIG. 25, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “239” to “245”, it is determined that it is within the reach-losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. do it.

  Further, when the effect control board 12 receives the first to third winning determination result notification commands and the fifth to seventh winning determination result notification commands, the shapes of the corresponding display parts in the start winning storage display area 5H are different. By doing so, it may be notified that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the re-variation effect is always executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, but the re-change effect may not necessarily be executed. For example, in the re-variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19, a determination value may be assigned to the determination result of “no re-change effect” and the re-change effect may be executed at a predetermined rate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the notice effect for notifying that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is executed during the change before the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. However, a notice effect such as “button notice” or “movable object notice” may be executed during the big hit gaming state. For example, when any one of the fifth to seventh winning determination result notification commands is received on the side of the effect control board 12 during the big hit gaming state, in step S519 of FIG. 33, the continuation shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is performed. Instead of the effect start setting process, the big hit continuous effect start setting process shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 is executed.

  In the big hit / continuous effect start setting process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit / continuous effect execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S801). ). Note that, when it is determined that the big hit / continuous effect execution flag is to be executed, the big hit / continuous effect execution flag is set to the ON state by, for example, the processing of step S806 shown in FIG. Cleared when finished and turned off. If the jackpot continuous production execution flag is on (step S801; Yes), the jackpot gaming state is based on the fact that one of the fifth to seventh winning determination result notification commands has already been received during the jackpot gaming state. Since it is determined that the continuous production is to be executed, the continuous production start setting process during the big hit is completed.

  If the big success game execution flag is off in step S801 (step S801; No), as a use table for determining whether or not the continuous production (button notice in this case) is executed during the big hit game state, The big hit medium continuous production determination table 166 shown in FIG. 50A is selected and set (step S802).

  The big hit / continuous effect determination table 166 shown in FIG. 50 (A) is referred to determine whether or not to perform the button effect continuous effect (notice effect) based on the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type. It is a table to be. In the big hit / continuous effect determination table 166, the value of the winning determination result buffer (winning determination result buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 21 is “5” or “6”. Depending on whether it is “7” or not, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type is the result of determination corresponding to “no button start” or “button notice”. Assigned.

  In the setting example of the big hit / continuous effect determination table 166 shown in FIG. 50A, depending on whether the winning determination result buffer value is “5”, “6”, or “7”, The assignment of the decision value to the decision result of whether or not to start the continuous performance in the big hit gaming state is different. With such a setting, the random number MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning is within the common reach non-reach losing pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range, the reach-losing pseudo continuous variation pattern common range, or the big hit pseudo-continuous variation pattern common range. Depending on the situation, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of whether or not to start the continuous performance. Further, in the setting example of the big hit / continuous effect determination table 166 shown in FIG. 50A, when the winning determination result buffer value is “7”, the winning determination result buffer value is “5” or “6”. More determined values than those in a certain case are assigned to a determination result (“button notice”) for executing a continuous effect. With such a setting, when the random number value MR1 extracted at the time of winning the start matches the determined value at which the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is at a higher rate than when it does not match. It is possible to make a decision to start a continuous production. Therefore, when a continuous production is executed during the big hit gaming state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is enhanced more than when the continuous production is not executed during the big hit gaming state. Can be improved. Further, in the setting example of the big hit / continuous effect determination table 166 shown in FIG. 50A, when the winning determination result buffer value is “6”, the winning determination result buffer value is “5”. Many decision values are assigned to a decision result (“button notice”) indicating that a continuous performance is to be executed during the big hit gaming state. With such a setting, when the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning the start matches the determined value that will be reached, a continuous production is started during the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when it does not match The decision to do so can be made. Therefore, when the continuous production is executed during the big hit gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the sense of expectation that the reach will be achieved compared to when the continuous production is not executed during the big hit gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S802, numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect pattern type is extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S803). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 extracted in step S803, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous effect by referring to the big hit / continuous effect determination table 166 set in step S802 (step S802). S804). At this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S804 that a continuous effect (here, button notice) is to be executed (step S805). If it is determined in step S805 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (step S805; No), the big hit medium continuous effect start setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S805 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S805; Yes), the big hit medium continuous effect execution flag is set to the on state (step S806), and the number of executions of the continuous effect is determined (step S807). . In the process of step S807, for example, according to the setting shown in FIG. 50B, one of one to three times corresponding to whether the winning determination result buffer value is “5” to “7”. The number of executions may be determined. Specifically, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR6 for determining the number of times of continuous effect execution is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. The random value SR6 for determining execution of continuous effects takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Based on whether the winning determination result buffer value is “5” to “7” and the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6, the number of continuous effect executions is determined according to the setting shown in FIG. To do. Here, when the number of continuous performance executions is 1, the continuous performance (notification effect) is executed in the 15th round in the big hit game state, and when the number of continuous performance executions is 2, the jackpot game When the continuous production is executed over the 14th and 15th rounds in the state and the number of continuous production executions is 3, the continuous production is performed over the 13th to 15th rounds in the big hit gaming state. It is supposed to be executed. In the setting shown in FIG. 50 (B), when the winning determination result buffer value is “7”, the number of continuous effect executions is larger than when the winning determination result buffer value is “5” or “6”. It becomes easy to become. In addition, when the winning determination result buffer value is “6”, the number of continuous performance executions is likely to increase more than when the winning determination result buffer value is “5”. With this setting, the greater the number of continuous performance executions during the jackpot gaming state, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in the variation after the jackpot gaming state ends. The expectation that an aspect may become reach can be raised.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S807, the first button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162A is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous effect patterns (step S808). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 for determining the first continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S809). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 extracted in step S809, the first continuous effect pattern is determined by referring to the first button notice continuous effect pattern determination table 162A set in step S808. (Step S810).

  After the process of step S810 is executed, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous performance executions determined in the process of step S807 is two or more (step S811). If the number of continuous performance executions is two times or more (step S811; Yes), the second button notice continuous corresponding to the determination result buffer value at the time of winning is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous performance patterns. The effect pattern determination tables 162B, 162D, and 162F are selected and set (step S812). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-2 for determining the second continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S813). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR2-2 extracted in step S813, the second button is determined by referring to the second button notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 162B, 162D, and 162F set in step S812. A notice continuous effect pattern is determined (step S814).

  After executing the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous performance executions determined in the process of step S807 is three (step S815). If the number of continuous performance executions is three (step S815; Yes), the third button notice continuous performance corresponding to the determination result buffer value at the time of winning is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of continuous performance patterns. The pattern determination tables 162C, 162E, 162G are selected and set (step S816). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-3 for determining the third continuous effect pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S817). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR2-3 extracted in step S817, the third button notice continuous performance pattern determination tables 162C, 162E, 162G set in step S816 are referred to, so that the third time An effect pattern is determined (step S818).

  If the number of continuous performance executions is less than 2 in step S811 (step S811; No), or if the number of continuous performance executions is not 3 in step S815 (step S815; No), after the process of step S818, For example, the result of determining the continuous effect pattern in steps S810, S814, and S818 is stored in the continuous effect pattern buffer included in the effect control buffer 194 by storing data indicating an identification number that can identify the continuous effect pattern. Is stored (step S819).

  After the process of step S819, the movable object notice effect start determination table 163 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the moveable object notice effect is started during the big hit gaming state (FIG. 49). Step S821).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S821, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the start of the moving object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S822). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 extracted in step S822, the movable object notice effect is started during the big hit gaming state by referring to the movable object notice effect start determination table 163 set in step S821. Is determined (step S823). At this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S823 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S824). When it is determined in step S824 that the movable object notice effect is not executed (step S824; No), the process proceeds to step S836 described later.

  If it is determined in step S824 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S824; Yes), the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of movable object notice effect patterns. Is selected and set (step S825). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first movable object notice effect is extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S826). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4-1 extracted in step S826, the first movable object notice effect pattern is determined by referring to the first movable object notice effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S825. Is determined (step S827).

  After executing the process of step S827, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous performance executions determined in the process of step S807 is two or more (step S828). If the number of continuous performance executions is 2 times or more (step S828; Yes), the second use corresponding to the winning determination result buffer value is possible as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of moving object notice performance patterns. The animal notice effect pattern determination tables 164B, 164D, and 164F are selected and set (step S829). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second movable object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S830). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR4-2 extracted in step S830, the second time possibility is determined by referring to the second movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164B, 164D, and 164F set in step S829. An animal notice effect pattern is determined (step S831).

  After executing the process of step S831, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous performance executions determined in the process of step S807 is three (step S832). Here, it is determined whether or not the third continuous effect is executed. If the number of continuous effect executions is three (step S832; Yes), the third movable object corresponding to the winning determination result buffer value is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of movable object notice effect patterns. The notice effect pattern determination tables 164C, 164E, 164G are selected and set (step S833). Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third movable object notice effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S834). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value SR4-3 extracted in step S834, the third possibility is determined by referring to the third movable object notice effect pattern determination tables 164C, 164E, and 164G set in step S833. An animal notice effect pattern is determined (step S835).

  If it is determined in step S824 that the movable object notice effect is not executed (step S824; No), if the number of continuous effect executions is less than two times in step S828 (step S828; No), the continuous effect is provided in step S832. When the number of executions is not three (step S832; No), after the process of step S835, the effect control buffer 194 includes data indicating an identification number or the like that can specify, for example, the movable object notice effect pattern. The determination result of the movable object notice effect pattern in steps S827, S831, and S835 is stored by storing it in the movable object notice effect pattern buffer (step S836). Then, the winning determination result buffer value is initialized to “0” (step S837), and the big success continuous effect start setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous production is executed during the big hit gaming state by the big hit and continuous production start setting process shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, or when the continuous production pattern is determined, the inside of the big hit control during the production process in step S164 of FIG. In FIG. 43, the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43 may be executed. In the big hit gaming state, for example, the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43 may be executed at the execution timing in the setting of FIG.

  As an example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (A) to 51 (C), a game ball that is won and won by the second start port switch 22B during the big hit gaming state is detected, and a “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed. After that, it is assumed that a seventh prize determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command is received in step S511 of FIG. 33 (step S511; Yes), and it is the seventh winning determination result notification command in step S512. Based on the determination and the like (step S512; No), the jackpot continuous production start setting process shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 is executed in the process of step S519.

  Then, it is determined in the process of step S805 that it is determined to execute the continuous effect during the big hit gaming state (step S805; Yes), and the number of continuous effect executions is twice (the 14th and 15th rounds) in the process of step S807. In step S810, it is determined to display the “CHANCE” notice message as the first continuous effect pattern, and in step S814, the “GOOD LUCK” notice message is displayed as the second continuous effect pattern. Suppose that it was decided to the thing. Further, it is determined in step S824 that it is determined to execute the movable object notice effect during the big hit gaming state (step S824; Yes), and in step S827, the first movable object notice effect pattern is set to the “first mode”. Assume that it is determined to be the “first mode” as the second movable object notice effect pattern in step S831.

  A display example in that case is shown below. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), when the game shifts to a round game of 14 rounds, the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43 is executed, and as shown in FIG. A button operation promotion effect is displayed in which a message image “Press the button !!” is displayed in FIG.

  Here, when the pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), a notice message “CHANCE” corresponding to the determination result of the continuous effect pattern of the first button notice is displayed. Further, in response to executing the movable object notice, the movable member 35 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) corresponding to the movable object notice effect pattern “first mode” of the first movable object notice.

  Thereafter, when the round game of 14 rounds ends, as shown in FIG. 51 (G), the game shifts to a round game of 15 rounds. Then, by executing the continuous effect execution process shown in FIG. 43, as shown in FIG. 51H, a button operation promotion effect in which a message image “Press the button!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. Is executed.

  Here, when a pressing operation of the operation button 32 is detected, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), a notice message “GOOD LUCK” corresponding to the determination result of the continuous effect pattern of the second button notice is displayed. . Further, in response to the execution of the movable object notice, the movable member 35 rotates clockwise (clockwise) corresponding to the movable object notice effect pattern “second mode” of the first movable object notice.

  Thereafter, when the round game of 15 rounds is completed, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the jackpot game state is ended.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52A, the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. This change is a change in which the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” that is the target of the advance notice by the continuous effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that PA 5-1 shown in FIG.

  In response to the determination of GC5 as the first pseudo-continuous chance and GC7 as the second pseudo-continuous chance in step S774 of FIG. 41, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), The pseudo-continuous chance GC5 (“5, 5, 6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first re-variation is executed as shown in FIG. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 (“7 · 7 · 8”) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the first re-variation is executed. Is done. 52A to 52F, the re-variation effect corresponding to the re-variation effect pattern determined in step S776 of FIG. 41 is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52G, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 52H, the reach effect is executed in which the reach mode is super reach. Thereafter, on the image display device 5, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols ("7, 7, 7") that is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is derived and displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (I), for example. This completes the variable display of the decorative symbols. Then, it shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  In this way, during the jackpot gaming state before the “pseudo-run” variable display effect is executed, the notice display effect (continuous effect) is executed, so that the “pseudo-game” variable display effect is executed. Can be forewarned.

  In the example of FIG. 51, an example is shown in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed in the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, in any of the fluctuations stored during the big hit gaming state, When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a notice effect (continuous effect) during the big hit gaming state may be executed.

  In addition, notice effects (continuous effects) such as “button notice” and “movable object notice” during the big hit gaming state are not limited to those executed during the round game as described above, but at the start of the big hit gaming state ( It may be executed at the end of the big hit gaming state (at the time of the ending effect) or a period until the big hit gaming state is started after the big hit combination is finally displayed. For example, you may make it perform all 1 to 3 continuous productions at the time of a big hit game state start, or the end of a big hit game state. Also, when the big hit gaming state starts, the first continuous production is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, the second continuous production is executed during the round game, and the third continuous production is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. During the round game, at the end of the big hit gaming state, it may be executed over two or more periods. The execution timing and the number of executions of such continuous effects may be determined in step S805 in FIG.

  Further, it has been described that whether or not to start a continuous production is determined on the side of the production control board 12 based on the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command from the main board 11. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the main board 11 side, it is determined whether or not to start a continuous effect, and an effect control command for notifying the determination result is sent from the main board 11. It may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Specifically, whether or not the continuous production is started by executing the processing corresponding to steps S704 to S707 in FIG. 34 according to the determination results in steps S353 and S357 in FIG. 25 and step S366 in FIG. It may be determined whether or not.

  In the above embodiment, when the start port buffer value is “1” in the winning specific pattern determining process of FIG. 25 and is controlled to the time-short state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, the winning determination result Regardless of whether or not the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted in step S362 so that the continuous effect is not executed, the first start winning opening in the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state The control for prohibiting the continuous performance based on the winning is not limited to this. For example, on the game control board 11 side, regardless of the gaming state, a winning determination result notification command of any of the first winning determination result notification command to the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted ( If the game state is specified on the side of the effect control board 12 and the game is controlled to the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit game state (without performing the processing of steps S350A to S350C), the first start winning prize You may make it not perform the continuous production | presentation based on the winning to a mouth. For example, a command that can specify the game state is transmitted from the game control board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the game state can be specified on the effect control board 12 side. When the gaming state is a short-time state, a probability variation state, or a big hit gaming state, even if the first to third winning determination result notification commands are notified, the continuous performance in step S509 of FIG. The start setting process may be skipped.

  In addition, when the start opening buffer value is “1” in the winning specific pattern determination process of FIG. 25 and is controlled to the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, the winning specific pattern determination process is ended. In this way, the winning determination result notification command may not be transmitted. In this case, a command that can specify the game state is transmitted from the game control board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the game state can be specified on the effect control board 12 side. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the game state is a short-time state, a probability change state, or a big hit game state, the display update setting at the start winning prize is set based on the reception of the first start opening winning designation command. (Step S504 in FIG. 33) is executed, and when the gaming state is not the short-time state, the probability variation state, or the big hit gaming state, the start winning time command process of FIG. 33 may be executed. Note that the determination of the end of the time-saving state may be performed by executing the same process as step S303 in FIG.

  In this embodiment, only the fourth winning determination result notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the big hit gaming state or during the execution of the short time control (high base state). Thus, the continuous production is not executed for the first start prize, but the prize determination result notification command other than the fourth prize determination result notification command is also transmitted so that the first start prize is received. On the other hand, it is possible not to execute the continuous performance.

  In the above embodiment, when the first continuous effect flag is on (step S632; Yes), if the second variation start command is received (step S633; Yes), the continuous effect is ended (step S635). The continuous effect is interrupted until the first variation start command is received (step S636). That is, the continuous effect corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is not executed during variable display corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. The present invention is not limited to this, and a continuous effect corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A may be executed during variable display corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the continuous effect start setting process in step S511, the setting process during continuous effect in step S512, and the final stop symbol determination process in step S513 shown in FIG. In the above description, the variable display effect setting process in step S514 and the continuous effect execution process in step S531 shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S551 to S555 shown in FIG. 38 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Any one of the processes may be executed, or the continuous effect execution process in step S561 shown in FIG. 42 may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Alternatively, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S555 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, any one of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type in accordance with the variation special figure designation buffer value as a “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that the table data allocated to a classification may be included. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... operation unit 31 ... operation detection switch 100 ... game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

After the game medium passes through the start area provided in the game area, based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display, variable display of multiple types of identification information that can identify each is performed, and the display result is derived. A gaming machine comprising variable display means for displaying and controlling a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the identification information,
When a game medium passes through the start area, a random number for determining a specific gaming state for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and a variable display determination for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information Extracting means for extracting a random number for use;
For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the starting area, the specific gaming state determination random number and the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means are set to a predetermined upper limit. A holding storage means for storing as holding storage within a range of numbers;
Predetermining means for determining whether to control to the specific gaming state using the specific gaming state determining random number based on the establishment of the start condition, before derivation display of the display result;
The determination result of the prior determination means, the number of reserved memories stored by the reservation storage means when the start condition is satisfied, the variable display determining random number extracted by the extracting means, and a plurality of types of variable display patterns Based on the determination value corresponding to, re-variation is executed once or a plurality of times after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display of the identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern for performing re-variable display;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of the identification information based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means;
A movable member that is provided at a position visible to the player and that operates according to a predetermined effect;
Before the determination by the variable display pattern determination means , the variable of the identification information based on the variable display determination random number value extracted by the extraction means and the determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns. A hold determination means for determining whether a display pattern is the specific variable display pattern;
If it is determined to be a said particular variable display pattern by said holding determining means, notice Te variable display smell before the variable display based on the particular variable display pattern which is the subject of the determination is performed Selecting whether or not to execute a notice effect for operating the movable member as an effect, and selecting a notice effect selection means for selecting a notice effect form when executing the notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effect aspects;
Based on the selected notice effect mode in the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display that is the object of the determination when the notice effect selecting means is selected to execute the notice effect. Notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect,
With
The announcement attraction selection means, before SL in accordance with the number of times of re-variation performed in a particular variable display pattern, select the plurality of types of prediction effect mode at different selected rate,
At least some of the determination values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern are set to the same determination value regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied,
The determination value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is set to a different determination value according to the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied,
The non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which a reach state is not established, and is variable from the start of variable display of the identification information to the derivation and display of the display information compared to the specific variable display pattern. Includes a variable display pattern for shortening the display time,
The variable display pattern determining means is compared with a case where the shortening condition is not satisfied when the shortening condition based on the number of reserved memories stored in the reservation storing means is satisfied when the start condition is satisfied. Then, a variable display pattern is determined using a determination value in which the number of determination values corresponding to the shortening variable display pattern is set,
The hold determination means determines whether or not the specific variable display pattern is obtained by determining whether or not the value of the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means matches the same determination value. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images